2008 Pilot PDF

０７／０５／０９１１：１２：１８３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００００２
Main Menu
Introduction
Congratulations! Your selection of a 2008 Honda Pilot was a wise investment. As you read this manual, you will
It will give you years of driving pleasure. find information that is preceded by
a symbol. This
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to information is intended to help you
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and avoid damage to your vehicle, other
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle so property, or the environment.
you can refer to it at any time.
Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights
and responsibilities.
Maintaining your vehicle according to the schedules given in this manual

helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment.
When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your dealer’s staff
is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your vehicle.
Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answer
any questions and concerns.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
i
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１２：２２３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００００３
Main Menu
Introduction
California Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm.
Event Data Recorders

This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. These
devices record front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failure
of any airbag system component. This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else
except as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.
Service Diagnostic Recorders

This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data
can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may
also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
ii
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１２：３３３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００００４
Main Menu
A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others, You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
is very important. And operating this including:
vehicle safely is an important
responsibility. Safety Labels − on the vehicle.
Safety Messages − preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of
To help you make informed three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
decisions about safety, we have These signal words mean:
provided operating procedures and
other information on labels and in You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
this manual. This information alerts HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
you to potential hazards that could
hurt you or others. You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
Of course, it is not practical or
possible to warn you about all the You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
hazards associated with operating or instructions.
maintaining your vehicle. You must
use your own good judgement. Safety Headings − such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
Safety Section − such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
Instructions − how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information − please read it
carefully.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
iii
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１２：３７３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００００５
Main Menu
Important Handling Information
Your Pilot has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use only on pavement. Higher ground
clearance has many advantages for off-highway driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, and rough
terrain. It also provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier.
These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher off the ground, it has a high
center of gravity. This means your vehicle can tip or roll over if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have a
significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly
more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder, make sure you and your passengers always wear
seat belts.
For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover, read ‘‘Driving Guidelines’’ on page 204 of this manual and the
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines section on page 230 . Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in loss of
control or an accident.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
iv
2008 Pilot
2008 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual
Contents
Owner's Identification Form
Introduction .......................................................................................................................................................... i
A Few Words About Safety .............................................................................................................................. iii
Important Handling Information .................................................................................................................... iv
Your Vehicle at a Glance (main controls) .................................................................................................... 4
Driver and Passenger Safety (seat belts, SRS, and child protection) .................................................... 7
Instruments and Controls (indicators, gauges, dashboard, and steering column) ............................................ 59
Features (heating and cooling, audio, steering wheel, and cruise control) ........................................................... 105
Before Driving (fuel, vehicle break- in, and cargo loading) ..................................................................... 187
Driving (engine and transmission operation) ................................................................................................ 203
Maintenance (minder, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage)........................................... 235
Taking Care of the Unexpected (flat tire, dead battery, overheating, and fuses) ............................. 271
Technical Information (vehicle specifications, tires, and emissions controls) ....................................... 291
Warranty and Customer Relations (U. S. and Canada only) (warranty and contact information) ... 307
Authorized Manuals (U. S. only) (how to order) ......................................................................................... 311
Index ............................................................................................................................... ........................................ I
Service Information Summary ( fluid capacities and tire pressures)

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
00X31-S9V-6502 1
０７／０５／０９１１：１２：４８３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００００７
Main Menu
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１３：０４３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００００８
Main Menu
Overview of Contents
Contents features. Technical Information

A convenient reference to the ID numbers, dimensions, capacities,
sections in this manual. Before Driving and technical information.
What gasoline to use, how to break-
Your Vehicle at a Glance in your new vehicle, and how to load Warranty and Customer
A quick reference to the main luggage and other cargo. Relations
controls in your vehicle. (U.S. and Canada only)
Driving A summary of the warranties
Driver and Passenger Safety The proper way to start the engine, covering your new vehicle, and how
Important information about the shift the transmission, and park; plus to contact us for any reason. Refer to
proper use and care of your vehicle’s what you need to know if you’re your warranty manual for detailed
seat belts, an overview of the planning to tow a trailer. information.
supplemental restraint system, and
valuable information on how to Maintenance Authorized Manuals
protect children with child restraints. The maintenance minder shows you (U.S. only)
when you need to take your vehicle How to order manuals and other
Instruments and Controls to the dealer for maintenance service. technical literature.
Explains the purpose of each There is also a list of things to check
instrument panel indicator and gauge, and instructions on how to check Index
and how to use the controls on the them.
dashboard and steering column. Service Information Summary
Taking Care of the Unexpected A summary of the information you
Features This section covers several problems need when you pull up to the fuel
How to operate the heating and air motorists sometimes experience, pump.
conditioning system, the audio and details how to handle them.
system, and other convenience
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１３：１２３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００００９
Main Menu
Your Vehicle at a Glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL DRIVER’S FRONT SHIFT LEVER REAR VIEW MIRROR WITH
INDICATORS(P. 61) AIRBAG (P. 11, 28) (P. 206) COMPASS＊ (P. 179)
GAUGES (P. 70)
AUDIO SYSTEM
POWER DOOR LOCK (P. 115)
SWITCH
(P. 82) PASSENGER’S
FRONT AIRBAG
(P. 11, 35)
MIRROR
CONTROLS HEATING/COOLING
(P. 93) SYSTEM
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
(P. 106)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
(P. 94)
GLOVE BOX
(P. 99)
HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE
(P. 190)
FUEL FILL DOOR PARKING BRAKE
RELEASE HANDLE PEDAL REAR A/C CONTROL ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
(P. 189) (P. 97) (P. 113) (P. 101)
Vehicle with rear entertainment system is shown.
＊ : If equipped.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１３：１９３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００１０
Main Menu
MOONROOF BUTTONS＊2 HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNAL/FOG LIGHTS＊2 HORN＊1 HAZARD WARNING BUTTON

(P. 96) (P. 75) (P. 77)
VTM-4 LOCK＊2
(P. 210)
LIGHT CONTROL PASSENGER AIRBAG

SWITCH OFF INDICATOR
(P. 102) (P. 35)
VEHICLE STABILITY
ASSIST (VSA)
SYSTEM OFF
SWITCH REAR WINDOW
(P. 219) DEFOGGER
(P. 77)
CRUISE CONTROL
MASTER BUTTON
(P. 177)
REMOTE AUDIO STEERING WHEEL CRUISE CONTROL WINDSHIELD WIPERS/

CONTROLS＊2 ADJUSTMENT BUTTONS WASHERS
(P. 140) (P. 78) (P. 177) (P. 74)
＊1 : To use the horn, press the pad around the ‘‘H’’ logo.
＊2 : If equipped.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１３：２２３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００１１
Main Menu
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１３：２６３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００１２
Main Menu
Driver and Passenger Safety
This section gives you important Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 22 All Children Should Sit in a
information about how to protect Automatic Seat Belt Back Seat .................................. 39
yourself and your passengers. It Tensioners ................................ 23 The Passenger’s Front Airbag
shows you how to use seat belts. It Seat Belt Maintenance ................ 23 Can Pose Serious Risks .......... 39

explains how your airbags work. And Additional Information About If You Must Drive with Several
it tells you how to properly restrain Your Airbags ........................... 25 Children .................................... 41
infants and children in your vehicle. Airbag System Components ....... 25 If a Child Requires Close
How Your Front Airbags Attention ................................... 41
Important Safety Precautions .......... 8 Work ..................................... 28 Additional Safety Precautions .... 42
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features........ 9 Advanced Airbags ....................... 30 Protecting Infants and Small
Seat Belts ...................................... 10 How Your Side Airbags Work.... 31 Children .................................... 43
Airbags .......................................... 11 How Your Side Curtain Airbags Protecting Infants ........................ 43
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 12 Work.......................................... 33 Protecting Small Children .......... 44
1. Close and Lock the Doors ...... 13 How the SRS Indicator Works ... 33 Selecting a Child Seat ...................... 45
2. Adjust the Front Seats ............ 13 How the Side Airbag Off Installing a Child Seat ..................... 46
3. Adjust the Seat-Backs ............. 14 Indicator Works ....................... 34 With LATCH ................................ 47
4. Adjust the Head Restraints .... 15 How the Passenger Airbag Off With a Lap/Shoulder Belt .......... 49
5. Fasten and Position the Seat Indicator Works ....................... 35 With a Tether ............................... 51
Belts ...................................... 15 Airbag Service .............................. 36 Protecting Larger Children ............ 53
6. Maintain a Proper Sitting Additional Safety Precautions .... 37 Checking Seat Belt Fit ................ 53
Position ................................. 18 Protecting Children − General Using a Booster Seat ................... 54
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 19 Guidelines ................................. 38 When Can a Larger Child Sit in
Additional Safety Precautions .... 20 All Children Must Be Front .......................................... 55
Additional Information About Your Restrained ................................ 38 Additional Safety Precautions .... 56
Seat Belts .................................. 21 Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 57
Seat Belt System Components ... 21 Safety Labels .................................... 58
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１３：３５３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００１３
Main Menu Table Of Contents

Important Safety Precautions
You’ll find many safety Restrain All Children every additional drink. So don’t drink
recommendations throughout this Children age 12 and under should and drive, and don’t let your friends
section, and throughout this manual. ride properly restrained in a back drink and drive, either.
The recommendations on this page seat, not the front seat. Infants and
are the ones we consider to be the small children should be restrained Control Your Speed
most important. in a child seat. Larger children Excessive speed is a major factor in
should use a booster seat and a lap/ crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
Always Wear Your Seat Belt shoulder belt until they can use the the higher the speed, the greater the
A seat belt is your best protection in belt properly without a booster seat risk, but serious injuries can also
all types of collisions. Airbags are (see pages 38 − 56 ). occur at lower speeds. Never drive
designed to supplement seat belts, faster than is safe for current
not replace them. So even though Be Aware of Airbag Hazards conditions, regardless of the
your vehicle is equipped with airbags, While airbags can save lives, they maximum speed posted.
make sure you and your passengers can cause serious or fatal injuries to
always wear your seat belts, and occupants who sit too close to them, Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
wear them properly (see page 15 ). or are not properly restrained. Condition
Infants, young children, and short Having a tire blowout or a
adults are at the greatest risk. Be mechanical failure can be extremely
sure to follow all instructions and hazardous. To reduce the possibility
warnings in this manual. of such problems, check your tire
pressures and condition frequently,
Don’t Drink and Drive and perform all regularly scheduled
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even maintenance (see page 237 ).
one drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions, and
your reaction time gets worse with
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
8
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１３：４２３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００１４

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Your vehicle is equipped with many

(9) (3) (1) (4) (11) features that work together to
protect you and your passengers
(10) during a crash.

(7) Some features do not require any
action on your part. These include a
strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger
compartment, front and rear crush
zones, a collapsible steering column,
and tensioners that tighten the front
seat belts in a crash.
However, you and your passengers

(10) (6) can’t take full advantage of these
(5) (7) (8) (2)
features unless you remain sitting in
(1) Safety Cage a proper position and always wear
(2) Crush Zones your seat belts. In fact, some safety
(3) Seats and Seat-Backs
(4) Head Restraints features can contribute to injuries if
(2) (5) Collapsible Steering Column they are not used properly.
(6) Seat Belts
(7) Front Airbags
(8) Front Seat Belt Tensioners The following pages explain how you
(9) Door Locks can take an active role in protecting
(10) Side Airbags yourself and your passengers.
(11) Side Curtain Airbags
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
9
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１３：５２３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００１５

Seat Belts Help keep you from being thrown

Your vehicle is equipped with seat against the inside of the vehicle
belts in all seating positions. Not wearing a seat belt properly and against other occupants.
increases the chance of serious
Your seat belt system also includes injury or death in a crash, even Keep you from being thrown out
an indicator on the instrument panel though your vehicle has airbags. of the vehicle.
and a beeper to remind you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts. Be sure you and your Help keep you in a good position
passengers always wear seat should the airbags ever deploy. A
Why Wear Seat Belts belts and wear them properly. good position reduces the risk of
Seat belts are the single most injury from an inflating airbag and
effective safety device for adults and allows you to get the best
larger children. (Infants and smaller When properly worn, seat belts: advantage from the airbag.
children must be properly restrained
in child seats.) Keep you connected to the vehicle Of course, seat belts cannot
so you can take advantage of the completely protect you in every
Not wearing a seat belt properly vehicle’s built-in safety features. crash. But in most cases, seat belts
increases the chance of serious can reduce your risk of serious
injury or death in a crash, even Help protect you in almost every injury.
though your vehicle has airbags. type of crash, including frontal,
side, and rear impacts and What you should do: Always wear
In addition, most states and all rollovers. your seat belt, and make sure you
Canadian provinces require you to wear it properly.
wear seat belts.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１３：５９３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００１６

Airbags

Your vehicle has a supplemental Your vehicle also has side airbags to In addition, your vehicle has side
restraint system (SRS) with front help protect the upper torso of the curtain airbags to help protect the
airbags to help protect the heads and driver or a front seat passenger heads of the driver, front passenger,
chests of the driver and a front seat during a moderate to severe side and passengers in the outer rear
passenger during a moderate to impact (see page 31 for more seating positions during a moderate
severe frontal collision (see page information on how your side airbags to severe side impact or rollover (see
28 for more information on how work). page 33 for more information on how
your front airbags work). your side curtain airbags work).
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
11
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１４：０７３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００１７

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features, Protecting Adults and Teens
The most important things you need What you should do: Always wear Protecting Adults and Teens
to know about your airbags are: your seat belt properly, and sit
upright and as far back from the Introduction
Airbags do not replace seat belts. steering wheel as possible while The following pages provide
They are designed to supplement allowing full control of the vehicle. A instructions on how to properly
the seat belts. front passenger should move their protect the driver, adult passengers,
seat as far back from the dashboard and teenage children who are large
Airbags offer no protection in rear as possible. enough and mature enough to drive
impacts, or minor frontal or side or ride in the front seat.
collisions. The rest of this section gives more
detailed information about how you See pages 38 − 56 for important
Airbags can pose serious hazards. can maximize your safety. guidelines on how to properly
To do their job, airbags must protect infants, small children, and
inflate with tremendous force. So Remember however, that no safety larger children who ride in your
while airbags help save lives, they system can prevent all injures or vehicle.
can cause minor injuries or more deaths that can occur in a severe
serious or even fatal injuries if crash, even when seat belts are
occupants are not properly properly worn and the airbags deploy.
restrained or sitting properly.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
12
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１４：１６３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００１８

Protecting Adults and Teens
1.Close and Lock the Doors 2.Adjust the Front Seats The National Highway Traffic Safety
After everyone has entered the Administration and Transport
vehicle, be sure the doors and the Canada recommend that drivers
tailgate are closed and locked. allow at least 10 inches (25 cm)

between the center of the steering
Your vehicle has a door and wheel and the chest. In addition to
tailgate monitor on the adjusting the seat, you can adjust the
instrument panel to indicate when a steering wheel up and down (see
specific door or the tailgate is not page 78 ).
tightly closed.
If you cannot get far enough away
Locking the doors reduces the from the steering wheel and still
chance of someone being thrown out reach the controls, we recommend
of the vehicle during a crash, and it that you investigate whether some
helps prevent passengers from Adjust the driver’s seat as far to the type of adaptive equipment may help.
accidentally opening a door and rear as possible while allowing you to
falling out. maintain full control of the vehicle.
Have a front passenger adjust their
Locking the doors also helps prevent seat as far to the rear as possible.
an outsider from unexpectedly
opening a door when you come to a If you sit too close to the steering
stop. wheel or dashboard, you can be
seriously injured by an inflating front
See page 82 for how to lock the airbag, or by striking the steering
doors, and page 66 for how the door wheel or dashboard.
and tailgate open monitor works. CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
13
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１４：２４３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００１９

3.Adjust the Seat-Backs
Sitting too close to a front Reclining the seat-back too far

airbag can result in serious can result in serious injury or
injury or death if the front death in a crash.
airbags inflate.
Adjust the seat-back to an
Always sit as far back from the upright position, and sit well
front airbags as possible. back in the seat.
Once your seat is adjusted correctly, Reclining a seat-back so that the

rock it back and forth to make sure shoulder part of the belt no longer
the seat is locked in position. rests against the occupant’s chest
Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a reduces the protective capability of
See page 87 for how to adjust the comfortable, upright position, the belt. It also increases the chance
seats. leaving ample space between your of sliding under the belt in a crash
chest and the airbag cover in the and being seriously injured. The
center of the steering wheel. farther a seat-back is reclined, the
greater the risk of injury.
Passengers with adjustable seat-
backs should also adjust their seat- See page 87 for how to adjust the
back to a comfortable, upright seat-backs.
position.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
14
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１４：３３３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００２０

4.Adjust the Head Restraints 5.Fasten and Position the Seat

Belts
Improperly positioning head Insert the latch plate into the buckle,
restraints reduces their then tug on the belt to make sure the

effectiveness, and you can be belt is securely latched. Check that
seriously injured in a crash. the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious
Make sure head restraints are injuries in a crash.
in place and positioned properly
before driving. The center seating position in the
second row and all third row seats
have a detachable seat belt that can
Properly adjusted head restraints be unlatched and retracted into the
will help protect occupants from ceiling to allow the seats to be folded
Adjust the driver’s head restraint so whiplash and other crash injuries. down. See page 17 for how to
the center of the back of your head unlatch and relatch a belt.
rests against the center of the See page 91 for how to adjust the
restraint. head restraints. Detachable seat belts should
normally be latched whenever the
Have passengers with adjustable seat-backs are in an upright position.
head restraints adjust their restraints See page 18 for how to unlatch a belt,
properly as well. Taller persons and page 17 for how to relatch a belt.
should adjust their restraint as high
as possible.
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
15
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１４：３９３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００２１

This spreads the forces of a crash

RELEASE
over the strongest bones in your BUTTONS
upper body.
Improperly positioning the seat

belts can cause serious injury
or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are

properly positioned before
driving.
Position the lap part of the belt as The front seats have adjustable seat
low as possible across your hips, belt anchors. To adjust the height of
then pull up on the shoulder part of If the seat belt touches or crosses an anchor, press and hold the release
the belt so the lap part fits snugly. your neck, or if it crosses your arm buttons, and slide the anchor up or
This lets your strong pelvic bones instead of your shoulder, you need to down as needed (it has four
take the force of a crash and reduces adjust the seat belt anchor height. positions).
the chance of internal injuries.
If necessary, pull up on the belt again

to remove any slack, then check that
the belt rests across the center of
your chest and over your shoulder.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
16
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１４：４７３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００２２

Using the Lap/Shoulder Belt Pull out the anchor latch and the sure the belt is not twisted. Push the
latch plate from each holding slot in anchor latch until it locks. Then
SECOND AND THIRD ROW CENTER the ceiling, and pull out the seat belt follow the procedure for fastening
POSITION to extend it. and positioning an ordinary seat belt

LATCH PLATE (see page 15 ).
For the third row outer positions,
slide out the outer shoulder belt
from the clip and pull the belt out to
extend it. Using a seat belt with the
detachable anchor unlatched
ANCHOR LATCH increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash.
ANCHOR LATCH
Before using the seat belt,
make sure the detachable
THIRD ROW OUTER POSITION anchor is correctly latched.
TRIANGLE
MARKS
ANCHOR BUCKLE
Insert the hook at the end of the

LATCH PLATE anchor latch into the anchor buckle
by lining up the triangle marks on
CLIP ANCHOR LATCH the anchor latch and buckle. Make CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
17
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１４：５５３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００２３

Never place the shoulder portion of a 6.Maintain a Proper Sitting

lap/shoulder belt under your arm or Position
ANCHOR LATCH behind your back. This could cause After all occupants have adjusted
very serious injuries in a crash. their seats and head restraints, and
put on their seat belts, it is very
If a seat belt does not seem to work important that they continue to sit
properly, it may not protect the upright, well back in their seats, with
occupant in a crash. their feet on the floor, until the
vehicle is parked and the engine is
No one should sit in a seat with an off.
inoperative seat belt. Using a seat
belt that is not working properly can Sitting improperly can increase the
ANCHOR BUCKLE result in serious injury or death. chance of injury during a crash. For
Have your dealer check the belt as example, if an occupant slouches,
To unlatch the detachable seat belt soon as possible. lies down, turns sideways, sits
anchor before folding down the seat- forward, leans forward or sideways,
back, insert your ignition key into See page 21 for additional or puts one or both feet up, the
the slot on the side of the anchor information about your seat belts chance of injury during a crash is
buckle and allow the seat belt to and how to take care of them. greatly increased.
retract. For the center seating
positions, place the latch plate and
anchor latch into their holding slots
in the ceiling. For the third row outer
seating positions, re-fasten the belt
with the clip.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
18
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１５：０２３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００２４

In addition, an occupant who is out of Advice for Pregnant Women When driving, remember to sit
position in the front seat can be upright and adjust the seat as far
seriously or fatally injured in a crash back as possible while allowing full
by striking interior parts of the control of the vehicle. When riding

vehicle or being struck by an as a front passenger, adjust the seat
inflating front airbag. as far back as possible.
This will reduce the risk of injuries

to both you and your unborn child
Sitting improperly or out of that can be caused by a crash or an
position can result in serious inflating front airbag.
injury or death in a crash.
Each time you have a checkup, ask
Always sit upright, well back in your doctor if it’s okay for you to
the seat, with your feet on the If you are pregnant, the best way to drive.
floor. protect yourself and your unborn
child when driving or riding in a
vehicle is to always wear a seat belt,
and keep the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across the hips.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
19
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１５：１０３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００２５

Additional Safety Precautions Do not put any accessories on seat Do not attach or place objects on
Never let passengers ride in the belts. Devices intended to improve the front airbag covers. Objects on
cargo area or on top of a folded- occupant comfort or reposition the the covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’
down back seat. If they do, they shoulder part of a seat belt can could interfere with the proper
could be very seriously injured in a reduce the protective capability of operation of the airbags or be
crash. the seat belt and increase the propelled inside the vehicle and
chance of serious injury in a crash. hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
Passengers should not stand up or
change seats while the vehicle is Do not place hard or sharp objects Do not attach hard objects on or
moving. A passenger who is not between yourself and a front near a door. If a side airbag or a
wearing a seat belt during a crash airbag. Carrying hard or sharp side curtain airbag inflates, a cup
or emergency stop can be thrown objects on your lap, or driving with holder or other hard object
against the inside of the vehicle, a pipe or other sharp object in attached on or near the door could
against other occupants, or out of your mouth, can result in injuries be propelled inside the vehicle and
the vehicle. if your front airbag inflates. hurt someone.
Two people should never use the Keep your hands and arms away
same seat belt. If they do, they from the airbag covers. If your
could be very seriously injured in a hands or arms are close to an
crash. airbag cover, they could be injured
if the airbag inflates.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
20
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１５：２０３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００２６

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt System Components your seat belt is not fastened before If the indicator comes on or the
Your seat belt system includes lap/ the beeper stops, the indicator will beeper sounds when the driver’s seat
shoulder belts in all eight seating stop flashing but remain on. belt is latched and there is no front
positions. The front seat belts are seat passenger and no items on the

also equipped with automatic seat If a front passenger does not fasten front seat, something may be
belt tensioners. their seat belt, the indicator will interfering with the monitoring
come on about 6 seconds after the system. Look for and remove:
This system uses the same sensors ignition switch is turned to the ON
as the front airbags to monitor (II) position. Any items under the front
whether the front seat belts are passenger’s seat.
latched or unlatched, and how much If either the driver or a front
weight is on the front passenger’s passenger does not fasten their seat Any object(s) hanging on the seat
seat (see pages 30 and 31 ). belt while driving, the beeper will or in the seat-back pocket.
sound and the indicator will flash
Seat Belt Reminder again at regular intervals. Any objects, such as a folded-down
The seat belt system back seat, that are touching the
includes an indicator on the When no one is sitting in the front rear of the seat-back.
instrument panel and a beeper to passenger’s seat, or a child or small
remind you and your passengers to adult is riding there, the indicator If no obstructions are found, have
fasten your seat belts. should not come on and the beeper your vehicle checked by a dealer.
should not sound.
This system monitors the front seat
belts. If you turn the ignition switch
to the ON (II) position before your
seat belt is fastened, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash. If
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
21
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１５：２８３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００２７

Lap/Shoulder Belt To unlock the belt, press the red If the shoulder part of the belt is
The lap/shoulder belt in the center PRESS button on the buckle. Guide pulled all the way out, the lockable
seat of the second and third row the belt across your body so that it retractor will activate. The belt will
seats is equipped with a detachable retracts completely. After exiting the retract, but it will not allow the
anchor that has two parts: a small vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the passenger to move freely.
latch plate and a buckle. way and will not get closed in the
door. To deactivate the lockable retractor,
The detachable anchor should unlatch the buckle and let the seat
normally be latched whenever the All seat belts have an emergency belt fully retract. To refasten the
seats-backs are in an upright position. locking retractor. In normal driving, seat belt, pull it out only as far as
For more information about the the retractor lets you move freely in needed.
detachable anchor (see page 17 ). your seat while it keeps some
tension on the belt. During a collision
The lap/shoulder belt goes over or sudden stop, the retractor
your shoulder, across your chest, automatically locks the belt to help
and across your hips. restrain your body.
To fasten the belt, insert the latch The seat belts in all positions except
plate into the buckle, then tug on the the driver’s have a lockable retractor
belt to make sure the buckle is that must be activated to secure a
latched (see page 15 for how to child seat (see page 49 ).
properly position the belt).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
22
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１５：３７３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００２８

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners If a side airbag or side curtain airbag Seat Belt Maintenance
deploys during a side impact, the For safety, you should check the
tensioner on that side of the vehicle condition of your seat belts regularly.
will also deploy.

Pull each belt out fully, and look for
The tensioners can also be activated frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check
during a collision in which the front that the latches work smoothly and
airbags do not deploy. In this case, the the belts retract easily. If a belt does
airbags would not be needed, but the not retract easily, cleaning the belt
additional restraint could be helpful. may correct the problem (see page
260 ). Any belt that is not in good
When the tensioners are activated, condition or working properly will
the seat belts will remain tight until not provide good protection and
they are unbuckled. should be replaced as soon as
For added protection, the front seat possible.
belts are equipped with automatic
seat belt tensioners. When activated, Honda provides a limited warranty
the tensioners immediately tighten on seat belts. See your Honda
the belts to help hold the driver and Warranty Information booklet for
a front passenger in position. details.
The tensioners are designed to

activate in any collision severe
enough to cause the front airbags to
deploy.
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
23
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１５：４２３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００２９

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,

it must be replaced by your dealer. A
belt that has been worn during a Not checking or maintaining
crash may not provide the same level seat belts can result in serious
of protection in a subsequent crash. injury or death if the seat belts
do not work properly when
The dealer should also inspect the needed.
anchors for damage and replace
them if needed. If the automatic seat Check your seat belts regularly
belt tensioners activate during a and have any problem
crash, they must be replaced. corrected as soon as possible.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
24
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１５：４９３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００３０

Additional Information About Your Airbags
Airbag System Components
(1) Driver’s Front Airbag

(2) Passenger’s Front Airbag (8) (14) (8)

(3) Control Unit
(10) (2)
(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(3)
(5) Side Airbags
(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor
(7) Front Passenger’s Position Sensors (11)
(8) Front Impact Sensors
(9) Side Impact Sensors (First) (12)
(10) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator (1) (5)
(11) Occupant Position Detection System
(OPDS) Sensors
(12) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors/
OPDS Sensors Control Unit (13) (4)
(13) Rollover Sensor
(14) Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Indicator
(9)
(6)
(7)
(9)
(5)
(4)
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
25
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１５：５５３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００３１

Your Airbag System includes:

(15) Rear Safing Sensor Two SRS (supplemental restraint
(16) Side Impact Sensor (second) system) front airbags. The driver’s
(17) Side Curtain Airbags (17) airbag is stored in the center of
the steering wheel; the front
passenger’s airbag is stored in the
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS
AIRBAG’’ (see page 28 ).
Two side airbags, one for the

driver and one for a front
passenger. The airbags are stored
in the outer edges of the seat-
backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDE
AIRBAG’’ (see page 31 ).
(16) Two side curtain airbags, one for
each side of the vehicle. The
airbags are stored in the ceiling,
above the side windows. The front
and rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDE
(15) CURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page
33 ).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
26
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１６：０５３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００３２

Automatic front seat belt Weight sensors that monitor the An indicator on the instrument
tensioners (see page 23 ). weight on the front passenger’s panel that alerts you to a possible
seat. If the weight is about 65 lbs problem with your airbags,
Sensors that can detect a (29 kg) or less (the weight of an sensors, or seat belt tensioners

moderate to severe front impact, infant or small child), the (see page 33 ).
side impact, or if your vehicle is passenger’s front airbag will be
about to rollover. turned off (see page 30 ). An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you that the
Sensors that can detect whether a A sophisticated electronic system passenger’s side airbag has been
child is in the passenger’s side that continually monitors and turned off (see page 34 ).
airbag path and signal the control records information about the
unit to turn the airbag off (see sensors, the control unit, the An indicator on the dashboard that
page 34 ). airbag activators, the seat belt alerts you that the passenger’s
tensioners, and driver and front front airbag has been turned off
Sensors that can detect whether passenger seat belt use when the (see page 35 ).
the driver’s seat belt and the front ignition switch is in the ON (II)
passenger’s seat belt are latched position. Emergency backup power in case
or unlatched (see page 21 ). your vehicle’s electrical system is
A rollover sensor that can detect if disconnected in a crash.
A driver’s seat position sensor that your vehicle is about to roll over
monitors the distance of the seat and signal the control unit to
from the front airbag. If the seat is deploy both side curtain airbags
too far forward, the airbag will and front seat belt tensioners (see
inflate with less force (see page page 33 ).
30 ).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
27
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１６：１３３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００３３

How Your Front Airbags Work During a frontal crash, your seat belt
restrains your lower body and torso,
and the front airbag helps protect
your head and chest.
Although both airbags normally

inflate within a split second of each
other, it is possible for only one
airbag to deploy.
This can happen if the severity of a

collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
If you ever have a moderate to such cases, the seat belt will provide After inflating, the front airbags
severe frontal collision, sensors will sufficient protection, and the immediately deflate, so they won’t
detect the vehicle’s rapid supplemental protection offered by interfere with the driver’s visibility,
deceleration. the airbag would be minimal. or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
If the rate of deceleration is high Only the driver’s airbag can deploy if
enough, the control unit will instantly there is no passenger in the front
inflate the driver’s and front seat, or if the advanced airbag
passenger’s airbags, at the time and system has turned the passenger’s
with the force needed. airbag off (see page 35 ).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
28
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１６：２１３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００３４

The total time for inflation and Dual-Stage Airbags Dual-Threshold Airbags
deflation is one-tenth of a second, so Your front airbags are dual-stage Your front airbags are also dual-
fast that most occupants are not airbags. This means they have two threshold airbags. Airbags with this
aware that the airbags deployed until inflation stages that can be ignited feature have two deployment

they see them lying in their laps. sequentially or simultaneously, thresholds that depend on whether
depending on crash severity. sensors detect the occupant is
After a crash, you may see what wearing a seat belt or not.
looks like smoke. This is actually In a more severe crash, both stages
powder from the airbag’s surface. will ignite simultaneously to provide If the occupant’s belt is not latched,
Although the powder is not harmful, the quickest and greatest protection. the airbag will deploy at a slightly
people with respiratory problems lower threshold, because the
may experience some temporary In a less severe crash, one stage will occupant would need extra
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of ignite first, then the second stage protection.
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do will ignite a split second later. This
so. provides longer airbag inflation time If the occupant’s belt is latched, the
with a little less force. airbag will inflate at a slightly higher
threshold, when the airbag would be
needed to supplement the protection
provided by the seat belt.
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
29
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１６：３０３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００３５

Advanced Airbags
Your front airbags are also advanced
airbags. The main purpose of this
feature is to help prevent airbag-
caused injuries to short drivers and
children who ride in front.
For both advanced airbags to work DRIVER’S

properly: SEAT PASSENGER’S
POSITION SEAT WEIGHT
SENSOR SENSOR
Occupants must sit upright and
wear their seat belts properly.
Do not spill any liquids on or The driver’s advanced front airbag The passenger’s advanced front
under the seats, cover the sensors, system includes a seat position airbag system has weight sensors
or put any objects or metal items sensor under the seat. If the seat is under the seat. Although Honda
under the front seats. too far forward, the airbag will does not encourage carrying an
inflate with less force, regardless of infant or small child in front, if the
Second-row passengers should not the severity of the impact. sensors detect the weight of an
put their feet under the front seats. infant or small child (up to about 65
If there is a problem with the sensor, lbs or 29 kg), the system will
Failure to follow these instructions the SRS indicator will come on, and automatically turn the passenger’s
could damage the sensors or prevent the airbag will inflate in the normal front airbag off.
them from working properly. manner regardless of the driver’s
seating position.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
30
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１６：３８３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００３６

Be aware that objects placed on the Moving the front seat forcibly How Your Side Airbags Work
passenger’s seat can also cause the back against cargo on the seat or
airbag to be turned off. floor behind it.

When the airbag is turned off, a Hanging heavy items on the front
‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator in passenger seat, or placing heavy
the center of the dashboard comes items in the seat-back pocket.
on (see page 35 ).
Also, make sure the floor mat
If the weight sensors detect there is behind the front passenger’s seat
no passenger in the front seat, the is properly positioned on the floor
airbag will be off. However, the (see page 260 ). If it is not, the mat
passenger airbag off indicator will may interfere with the proper
not come on. operation of the front passenger’s
seat and its sensors. If you ever have a moderate to
To ensure that the passenger’s severe side impact, sensors will
advanced front airbag system will detect rapid acceleration and signal
work properly, do not do anything the control unit to instantly inflate
that would increase or decrease the either the driver’s or the passenger’s
weight on the front passenger’s seat. side airbag and activate the seat belt
This includes: tensioner on the affected side.
A second-row passenger pushing

or pulling on the back of the front
passenger’s seat.
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
31
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１６：４５３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００３７

Only one airbag will deploy during a Side Airbag Cutoff System If the side airbag off indicator comes
side impact. If the impact is on the Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoff on (see page 35 ), have the
passenger’s side, the passenger’s system designed primarily to protect passenger sit upright. Once the
side airbag will deploy even if there a child riding in the front passenger’s passenger is out of the airbag’s
is no passenger. seat. deployment path, the system will
turn the airbag back on, and the
To get the best protection from the Although Honda does not encourage indicator will go out.
side airbags, front seat occupants children to ride in front, if the
should wear their seat belts and sit position sensors detect a child has There will be some delay between
upright and well back in their seats. leaned into the side airbag’s the moment the passenger moves
deployment path, the airbag will shut into or out of the airbag deployment
off. path and when the indicator comes
on or goes off.
The side airbag may also shut off if a
short adult leans sideways, or a A front seat passenger should not
larger adult slouches and leans use a cushion or other object as a
sideways into the airbag’s backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
deployment path. system from working properly.
Objects placed on the front

passenger seat can also cause the
side airbag to be shut off.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
32
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１６：５５３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００３８

How Your Side Curtain Airbags If the impact is on the passenger’s How the SRS Indicator Works
Work side, the passenger’s side curtain The SRS indicator alerts
airbag will inflate even if there are no you to a potential problem
occupants on that side of the vehicle. with your airbags or seat belt

tensioners (see page 23 ).
In a Rollover
If the rollover sensor detects your When you turn the ignition switch to
vehicle is about to roll over, it signals the ON (II) position, this indicator
the control unit, which immediately comes on briefly then goes off. This
deploys both side curtain airbags and tells you the system is working
activates both front seat belt properly.
tensioners.
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG
The airbag on the passenger’s side
will deploy, and the seat belt
In a Side Impact tensioner will activate, even if there
In a moderate to severe side impact, are no passengers on that side of the
sensors will detect rapid acceleration vehicle.
and signal the control unit to
instantly inflate the side curtain To get the best protection from the
airbag and activate the seat belt side curtain airbags, occupants
tensioner on the driver’s or the should wear their seat belts and sit
passenger’s side of the vehicle. upright and well back in their seats.
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
33
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１７：０４３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００３９

If the indicator comes on at any U.S. Canada

other time, or does not come on at all, How the Side
you should have the system checked Ignoring the SRS indicator can Airbag Off
by your dealer. For example: result in serious injury or death Indicator Works
if the airbag systems or This indicator alerts you that the
If the SRS indicator does not come tensioners do not work properly. passenger’s side airbag has been
on after you turn the ignition automatically shut off. It does not
switch to the ON (II) position. Have your vehicle checked by a mean there is a problem with your
dealer as soon as possible if side airbags.
If the indicator stays on after the the SRS indicator alerts you to
engine starts. a possible problem. When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the indicator
If the indicator comes on or should come on briefly and then go
flashes on and off while you drive. off (see page 63 ). If it doesn’t come
on, stays on, or comes on while
If you see any of these indications, driving without a passenger in the
the airbags and seat belt tensioners front seat, have the system checked.
may not work properly when you
need them.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
34
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１７：１２３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００４０

How the Passenger Airbag Off Be aware that objects placed on the
Indicator Works front seat can cause the indicator to
come on.
U.S. models Canadian models

If no weight is detected in the front
seat, the airbag will be automatically
shut off. However, the indicator will
4WD 2WD 4WD 2WD
not come on.
The passenger airbag off indicator

may come on and off repeatedly if
the total weight on the seat is near
the airbag cutoff threshold.
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR
If an adult or teenage passenger is
This indicator alerts you that the riding in front, move the seat as far
passenger’s front airbag has been to the rear as possible, and have the
shut off because weight sensors passenger sit upright and wear the
detect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less seat belt properly.
(the weight of an infant or small
child) on the front passenger’s seat.
It does not mean there is a problem
with the airbag.
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
35
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１７：２０３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００４１

If the indicator comes on with no Airbag Service An airbag ever inflates. Any airbag
front seat passenger and no objects Your airbag system is virtually that has deployed must be
on the seat, or with an adult riding maintenance-free, and there are no replaced along with the control
there, something may be interfering parts you can safely service. unit and other related parts. Any
with the weight sensors. Look for However, you must have your seat belt tensioner that activates
and remove: vehicle serviced if: must also be replaced.
Any items under the front Do not try to remove or replace

passenger’s seat. any airbag by yourself. This must
be done by an authorized dealer or
Any object hanging on the seat or a knowledgeable body shop.
in the seat-back pocket.
Any object, such as a folded-down

back seat, that is touching the rear
of the seat-back.
If no obstructions are found, have

your vehicle checked by a dealer as
soon as possible.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
36
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１７：２７３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００４２

The SRS indicator alerts you to a Additional Safety Precautions Do not cover or replace front seat-
problem. Take your vehicle to an Do not attempt to deactivate your back covers without consulting
authorized dealer as soon as airbags. Together, airbags and your dealer. Improperly replacing
possible. If you ignore this seat belts provide the best or covering front seat-back covers

indication, your airbags may not protection. can prevent your side airbags from
operate properly. inflating during a side impact.
Do not tamper with airbag
If your vehicle has a moderate to components or wiring for any Do not expose the front passenger’s
severe impact. Even if your reason. Tampering could cause seat-back to liquid. If water or
airbags do not inflate, your dealer the airbags to deploy, possibly another liquid soaks into a seat-
should inspect the driver’s seat causing very serious injury. back, it can prevent the side airbag
position sensor, the front cutoff system from working
passenger’s weight sensors, the Do not remove or modify a front properly.
front seat belt tensioners, and all seat without consulting your
seat belts worn during a crash to dealer. This could make the
make sure they are operating driver’s seat position sensor or the
properly. front passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective. If it is necessary to
remove or modify a front seat to
accommodate a person with
disabilities, first contact Honda
Automobile Customer Service at
(800) 999-1009.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
37
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１７：３５３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００４３

Protecting Children − General Guidelines
All Children Must Be Restrained

Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because Children who are unrestrained
they are either unrestrained or not or improperly restrained can be
properly restrained. In fact, vehicle seriously injured or killed in a
accidents are the number one cause crash.
of the death of children age 12 and
under. Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
To reduce the number of child restrained in a child seat. A
deaths and injuries, every U.S. state larger child should be properly
and Canadian province requires that restrained with a seat belt and
infants and children be properly use a booster seat if necessary.
Children depend on adults to protect restrained when they ride in a
them. However, despite their best vehicle.
intentions, many adults do not know Larger children must be restrained
how to properly protect child Infants and small children must be with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on
passengers. restrained in an approved child seat a booster seat until the seat belt fits
that is properly secured to the them properly (see pages 53 − 56 ).
If you have children, or ever need to vehicle (see pages 43 − 52 ).
drive with a child in your vehicle, be
sure to read this section. It begins
with important general guidelines,
then presents special information for
infants, small children, and larger
children.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
38
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１７：４６３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００４４

All Children Should Sit in a Back The Passenger’s Front Airbag Small Children
Seat Can Pose Serious Risks Placing a forward-facing child seat in
According to accident statistics, Front airbags have been designed to the front seat of a vehicle equipped
children of all ages and sizes are help protect adults in a moderate to with a passenger’s front airbag can

safer when they are restrained in a severe frontal collisions. To do this be hazardous. If the vehicle seat is
back seat. The National Highway the passenger’s front airbag is quite too far forward, or the child’s head is
Traffic Safety Administration and large, and it can inflate with enough thrown forward during a collision, an
Transport Canada recommend that force to cause very serious injuries. inflating front airbag can strike the
all children age 12 and under be child with enough force to kill or
properly restrained in a back seat. Even though your vehicle has an very seriously injure a small child.
Some states have laws restricting advanced front airbag system that
where children may ride. automatically turns the passenger’s Larger Children
front airbag off (see page 35 ), Children who have outgrown child
Children who ride in back are less please follow these guidelines: seats are also at risk of being injured
likely to be injured by striking or killed by an inflating passenger’s
interior vehicle parts during a Infants front airbag. Whenever possible,
collision or hard braking. Also, Never put a rear-facing child seat in larger children should sit in the back
children cannot be injured by an the front seat of a vehicle equipped seat, on a booster seat if needed, and
inflating front airbag when they ride with a passenger’s front airbag. If be properly restrained with a seat
in the back. the airbag inflates, it can hit the back belt (see page 53 for important
of the child seat with enough force information about protecting larger
to kill or very seriously injure an children).
infant.
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
39
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１７：５７３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００４５

To remind you of the passenger’s U.S. Models DASHBOARD

front airbag hazards, and that SUN VISORS
children must be properly restrained
in a back seat, your vehicle has
warning labels on the dashboard (on
U.S. models, the dashboard label is
removed by the owner) and on the
front visors. Please read and follow
the instructions on these labels.
Canadian Models
SUN VISORS
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
40
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１８：０５３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００４６

If You Must Drive with Several If a Child Requires Close If a child requires close physical
Children Attention attention or frequent visual
Your vehicle has two rows of back Many parents say they prefer to put contact, we strongly recommend
seats where children can be properly an infant or a small child in the front that another adult ride with the

restrained. If you ever have to carry passenger seat so they can watch the child in a back seat. The back seat
a group of children, and a child must child, or because the child requires is far safer for a child than the
ride in front: attention. front.
Place the largest child in the front Placing a child in the front seat
seat, provided the child is large exposes the child to hazards in a
enough to wear the lap/shoulder frontal collision, and paying close
belt properly (see page 53 ). attention to a child distracts the
driver from the important tasks of
Move the vehicle seat as far to the driving, placing both of you at risk.
rear as possible (see page 13 ).
Have the child sit upright and well

back in the seat (see page 18 ).
Make sure the seat belt is properly

positioned and secured (see page
18 ).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
41
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１８：１２３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００４７

Additional Safety Precautions Make sure any unused seat belt For example, infants and small
Never hold an infant or child on that a child can reach is buckled, children left in a vehicle on a hot
your lap. If you are not wearing a the lockable retractor is activated, day can die from heatstroke. A
seat belt in a crash, you could be and the belt is fully retracted and child left alone with the key in the
thrown forward and crush the locked. If a child wraps a loose ignition switch can accidentally set
child against the dashboard or a seat belt around their neck, they the vehicle in motion, possibly
seat-back. If you are wearing a can be seriously or fatally injured. injuring themselves or others.
seat belt, the child can be torn (See pages 49 and 50 for how to
from your arms and be seriously activate and deactivate the Lock all doors and the tailgate
hurt or killed. lockable retractor.) when your vehicle is not in use.
Children who play in vehicles can
Never put a seat belt over yourself Use the childproof door locks to accidentally get trapped inside.
and a child. During a crash, the prevent children from opening the Teach your children not to play in
belt could press deep into the child rear doors. This can prevent or around vehicles.
and cause serious or fatal injuries. children from accidentally falling
out (see page 83 ). Keep vehicle keys/remote
Never let two children use the transmitters out of the reach of
same seat belt. If they do, they Do not leave children alone in a children. Even very young
could be very seriously injured in a vehicle. Leaving children without children learn how to unlock
crash. adult supervision is illegal in most vehicle doors, turn on the ignition
states and Canadian provinces, switch, and open the tailgate,
and can be very hazardous. which can lead to accidental injury
or death.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
42
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１８：２２３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００４８

Protecting Infants and Small Children
Protecting Infants Two types of seats may be used: a Rear-facing Child Seat Placement
seat designed exclusively for infants, A rear-facing child seat can be placed
or a convertible seat used in the rear- in any seating position in the back
facing, reclining mode. seat, but not in the front. Never put a

rear-facing child seat in the front
Do not put a rear-facing child seat in seat.
a forward-facing position. If placed
facing forward, an infant could be If the passenger’s front airbag
very seriously injured during a inflates, it can hit the back of the
frontal collision. child seat with enough force to kill or
seriously injure an infant.
When properly installed in the

second row, a rear-facing child seat
Child Seat Type may prevent the driver or a front
An infant must be properly passenger from moving their seat as
restrained in a rear-facing, reclining far back as recommended, or from
child seat until the child reaches the locking their seat-back in the desired
seat maker’s weight or height limit position.
for the seat, and the child is at least
one year old. It can also interfere with proper
operation of the passenger’s
Only a rear-facing child seat provides advanced front airbag system.
proper support for a baby’s head,
neck, and back.
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
43
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１８：３０３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００４９

Protecting Infants and Small Children
In any of these situations, we Protecting Small Children We also recommend that a small
strongly recommend that you install child use the child seat until the child
the child seat directly behind the reaches the weight or height limit
front passenger’s seat, move the seat for the seat.
as far forward as needed, and leave it
unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get Child Seat Placement
a smaller rear-facing child seat. We strongly recommend placing a
forward-facing child seat in a back
seat, not the front.
Placing a rear-facing child seat Placing a forward-facing child seat in

in the front seat can result in the front seat of a vehicle equipped
serious injury or death during a with a passenger’s airbag can be
collision. hazardous. If the vehicle seat is too
Child Seat Type far forward, or the child’s head is
Always place a rear-facing child A child who is at least one year old, thrown forward during a collision, an
seat in the back seat, not the and who fits within the child seat inflating airbag can strike the child
front. maker’s weight and height limits, with enough force to cause very
should be restrained in a forward- serious or fatal injuries.
facing, upright child seat.
Of the different seats available, we

recommend those that have a five-
point harness system as shown.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
44
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１８：３９３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００５０

Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat
Even with advanced front airbags, Selecting a Child Seat Whatever type of seat you choose, to
which can automatically turn the When buying a child seat, you need provide proper protection, a child
passenger’s front airbag off (see to choose either a conventional child seat should meet three
page 35 ), a back seat is the safest seat, or one designed for use with requirements:

place for a small child. the lower anchors and tethers for
children (LATCH) system. 1. The child seat should meet U.S. or
If it is necessary to put a forward- Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
facing child seat in the front, move Conventional child seats must be Standard 213. Look for FMVSS
the vehicle seat as far to the rear as secured to a vehicle with a seat belt, 213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.
possible, and be sure the child seat is whereas LATCH-compatible seats
firmly secured to the vehicle and the are secured by attaching the seat to 2. The child seat should be of the
child is properly strapped in the seat. hardware built into the two outer proper type and size to fit the child.
second row seats. Rear-facing for infants, forward-
facing for small children.
Since LATCH-compatible child seats
Placing a forward-facing child are easier to install and reduce the 3. The child seat should fit the
seat in the front seat can result possibility of improper installation, vehicle seating position (or
in serious injury or death if the we recommend selecting this style. positions) where it will be used.
front airbag inflates.
In seating positions and vehicles not Before purchasing a conventional
If you must place a forward- equipped with LATCH, a LATCH- child seat, or using a previously
facing child seat in front, move compatible child seat can be installed purchased one, we recommend that
the vehicle seat as far back as using a seat belt. you test the seat in the specific
possible, and properly restrain vehicle seating position or positions
the child. where the seat will be used.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
45
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１８：４５３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００５１

Installing a Child Seat
After selecting a proper child seat 2. Make sure the child seat is firmly 3. Secure the child in the child seat.
and a good place to install the seat, secured. After installing a child Make sure the child is properly
there are three main steps in seat, push and pull the seat strapped in the child seat
installing the seat: forward and from side-to-side to according to the child seat maker’s
verify that it is secure. instructions. A child who is not
1. Properly secure the child seat to properly secured in a child seat
the vehicle. All child seats must be A child seat secured with a seat belt can be seriously injured in a crash.
secured to the vehicle with the lap should be installed as firmly as
part of a lap/shoulder belt or with possible. However, it does not need The following pages provide
the LATCH (lower anchors and to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side guidelines on how to properly install
tethers for children) system. A movement can be expected and a child seat. A forward-facing child
child whose seat is not properly should not reduce the child seat’s seat is used in all examples, but the
secured to the vehicle can be effectiveness. instructions are the same for rear-
endangered in a crash. facing child seats.
If the child seat is not secure, try
installing it in a different seating
position, or use a different style of
child seat that can be firmly secured.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
46
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１８：５４３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００５２

Installing a Child Seat with BUTTON

LATCH
Your vehicle is equipped with
LATCH (lower anchors and tethers

for children) at the outer second row LOWER
seats. The lower anchors are located ANCHORS
between the seat-back and seat
bottom, and are to be used only with
a child seat designed for use with
LATCH.
The location of each lower anchor is Rigid-type

indicated by a small button above the
anchor point. To install a LATCH-compatible child 3. Place the child seat on the vehicle
seat: seat, then attach the seat to the
lower anchors according to the
1. Move the seat belt buckle or child seat maker’s instructions.
tongue away from the lower
anchors. Some LATCH-compatible seats
have a rigid-type connector as
2. Make sure there are no objects shown above.
near the anchors that could
prevent a secure connection
between the child seat and the
anchors.
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
47
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１９：０１３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００５３

7. Push and pull the child seat

ANCHOR forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
Flexible-type TETHER STRAP HOOK
Other LATCH-compatible seats 5. Lift the head restraint (see page

have a flexible-type connector as 91 ), then route the tether strap
shown above. through the legs of the head
restraint and over the seat-back,
4. Whatever type you have, follow making sure the strap is not
the child seat maker’s instructions twisted.
for adjusting or tightening the fit.
6. Attach the tether strap hook to the
tether anchor, then tighten the
strap as instructed by the child
seat maker.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
48
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１９：０９３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００５４

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/

Shoulder Belt
When not using the LATCH system,
all child seats must be secured to the

vehicle with the lap part of a lap/
shoulder belt.
In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in

all seating positions except the
driver’s have a lockable retractor
that must be activated to secure a
child seat.
If you intend to install a child seat in 1. With the child seat in the desired 2. To activate the lockable retractor,
the center seating position of the seating position, route the belt slowly pull the shoulder part of the
second row or in the third row, make through the child seat according belt all the way out until it stops,
sure the detachable seat belt is to the seat maker’s instructions, then let the belt feed back into the
securely latched (see page 17 ). then insert the latch plate into the retractor.
buckle.
3. After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked, and
you will need to repeat these steps.
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
49
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１９：１５３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００５５

To deactivate the lockable retractor

and remove a child seat, unlatch the
buckle, unroute the seat belt, and let
the belt fully retract.
4. After confirming that the belt is 5. Push and pull the child seat
locked, grab the shoulder part of forward and from side-to-side to
the belt near the buckle, and pull verify that it is secure enough to
up to remove any slack from the stay upright during normal driving
lap part of the belt. Remember, if maneuvers. If the child seat is not
the lap part of the belt is not tight, secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
the child seat will not be secure. retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
To remove slack, it may help to
put weight on the child seat, or
push on the back of the seat while
pulling up on the belt.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
50
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１９：２２３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００５６

Installing a Child Seat with a Second Row Installation

Tether
A child seat with a tether can be
installed in any seating position in

the second or third row seats.
Since a tether can provide additional

security to the lap/shoulder belt
installation, we recommend using a
tether whenever one is required or
available.
TETHER ANCHORAGE POINT
Each second row seat has a tether 1. After properly securing the child
anchorage point behind the seat- seat (see page 49 ), lift the head
back. restraint, then route the tether
strap over the seat-back and
through the head restraint legs.
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
51
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１９：３０３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００５７

Third Row Installation 2. Slide the anchor cover open as

shown, then attach the tether
strap hook to the anchor, making
sure the strap is not twisted.
3. Tighten the strap according to the

seat maker’s instructions.
Follow steps 1 and 2 of the second

row seat installation.
2. Attach the tether strap hook to the Each third row seat has a tether
anchor, making sure the tether anchorage point on the tailgate sill.
strap is not twisted.
1. After properly securing the child
Tighten the strap according to the seat (see page 49 ), lift the head
seat maker’s instructions. restraint, then route the tether
strap over the seat-back and
through the head restraint legs.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
52
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１９：３７３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００５８

Protecting Larger Children
When a child reaches the Checking Seat Belt Fit

recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the Allowing a child age 12 or under
child should sit in a back seat on a to sit in front can result in injury

booster seat and wear a lap/shoulder or death if the passenger’s front
belt. airbag inflates.
The following pages give If a child must ride in front,

instructions on how to check proper move the vehicle seat as far
seat belt fit, what kind of booster back as possible, use a booster
seat to use if one is needed, and seat if needed, have the child
important precautions for a child sit up properly and wear the
who must sit in front. seat belt properly.
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt

properly fits a child, have the child
put on the seat belt, then ask
yourself:
1. Does the child sit all the way back

against the seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend

comfortably over the edge of the
seat?
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
53
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１９：４５３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００５９

3. Does the shoulder belt cross Using a Booster Seat Some states and Canadian provinces
between the child’s neck and arm? also require children to use a booster
seat until they reach a given age or
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as weight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Be
possible, touching the child’s sure to check current laws in the
thighs? states or provinces where you intend
to drive.
5. Will the child be able to stay
seated like this for the whole trip? Booster seats can be high-back or
low-back. Whichever style you select,
If you answer yes to all these make sure the booster seat meets
questions, the child is ready to wear federal safety standards (see page
the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If 45 ) and that you follow the booster
you answer no to any question, the seat maker’s instructions.
child needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a forward-
facing child seat should ride in a If a child who uses a booster seat
back seat and use a booster seat must ride in front, move the vehicle
until the lap/shoulder belt fits them seat as far back as possible, and be
properly without the booster. sure the child is wearing the seat
belt properly.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
54
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１９：５４３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００６０

A child may continue using a booster When Can a Larger Child Sit in Of course, children vary widely. And
seat until the tops of their ears are Front while age may be one indicator of
even with the top of the vehicle’s or The National Highway Traffic Safety when a child can safely ride in front,
booster’s seat-back. A child of this Administration and Transport there are other important factors you

height should be tall enough to use Canada recommend that all children should consider.
the lap/shoulder belt without a age 12 and under be properly
booster seat. restrained in a back seat. Physical Size
Physically, a child must be large
If the passenger’s front airbag enough for the lap/shoulder belt to
inflates in a moderate to severe properly fit (see pages 16 and 53 ). If
frontal collision, the airbag can cause the seat belt does not fit properly,
serious injuries to a child who is with or without the child sitting on a
unrestrained, improperly restrained, booster seat, the child should not sit
sitting too close to the airbag, or out in front.
of position.
Maturity
A side airbag also poses risks. If any To safely ride in front, a child must
part of a larger child’s body is in the be able to follow the rules, including
path of a deploying side airbag, the sitting properly, and wearing the seat
child could receive possibly serious belt properly throughout a ride.
injuries.
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
55
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２０：０１３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００６１

If you decide that a child can safely Additional Safety Precautions Do not put any accessories on a
ride up front, be sure to: Do not let a child wear a seat belt seat belt. Devices intended to
across the neck. This could result improve a child’s comfort or
Carefully read the owner’s manual, in serious neck injuries during a reposition the shoulder part of a
and make sure you understand all crash. seat belt can make the belt less
seat belt instructions and all safety effective and increase the chance
information. Do not let a child put the shoulder of serious injury in a crash.
part of a seat belt behind the back
Move the vehicle seat to the rear- or under the arm. This could
most position. cause very serious injuries during
a crash. It also increases the
Have the child sit up straight, back chance that the child will slide
against the seat, and feet on or under the belt in a crash and be
near the floor. injured.
Check that the child’s seat belt is Two children should never use the
properly and securely positioned. same seat belt. If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
Supervise the child. Even mature crash.
children sometimes need to be
reminded to fasten the seat belts
or sit properly.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
56
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２０：１０３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００６２

Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Your vehicle’s exhaust contains With the tailgate open, air flow can
carbon monoxide gas. Carbon pull exhaust gas into your vehicle’s
monoxide should not enter the Carbon monoxide gas is toxic. interior and create a hazardous
vehicle in normal driving if you Breathing it can cause condition. If you must drive with the

maintain your vehicle properly and unconsciousness and even kill tailgate open, open all the windows
follow the information on this page. you. and set the heating and cooling
system/climate control system as
Have the exhaust system inspected Avoid any enclosed areas or shown below.
for leaks whenever: activities that expose you to
carbon monoxide. If you must sit in your parked vehicle
The vehicle is raised for an oil with the engine running, even in an
change. unconfined area, adjust the heating
High levels of carbon monoxide can and cooling system/climate control
You notice a change in the sound collect rapidly in enclosed areas, system as follows:
of the exhaust. such as a garage. Do not run the
engine with the garage door closed. 1. Select the fresh air mode.
The vehicle was in an accident Even with the door open, run the 2. Select the mode.
that may have damaged the engine only long enough to move the 3. Turn the fan on high speed.
underside. vehicle out of the garage. 4. Set the temperature control to a
comfortable setting.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
57
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２０：３１３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００６３

Safety Labels
These labels are in the locations DASHBOARD SUN VISORS

shown. They warn you of potential U.S. models only U.S. models
hazards that could cause serious
injury. Read these labels carefully.
If a label comes off or becomes hard

to read (except for the U.S.
dashboard label which may be
removed by the owner), contact your
dealer for a replacement.
HOOD Canadian models
DOORJAMBS
U.S. models Canadian models U.S. models only
RADIATOR CAP
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
58
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２０：３５３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００６４
Main Menu
Instruments and Controls
This section gives information about Control Locations ............................ 60 Door Locks ....................................... 82
the controls and displays that Instrument Panel ............................. 61 Power Door Locks ....................... 82
contribute to the daily operation of Instrument Panel Indicators ........... 62 Tailgate ......................................... 82
your vehicle. All the essential Gauges .............................................. 70 Childproof Door Locks ................... 83
controls are within easy reach. Trip Meter .................................... 70 Remote Transmitter ........................ 83
Odometer ...................................... 70 Seat Heaters ..................................... 86

Fuel Gauge ................................... 70 Seats .................................................. 87
Temperature Gauge .................... 71 Head Restraints ........................... 91
Outside Temperature Mirrors .............................................. 92
Indicator .................................... 71 Power Windows ............................... 94
Check Fuel Cap Message ........... 72 Moonroof .......................................... 96
Controls Near the Steering Parking Brake .................................. 97
Wheel ............................................ 73 Interior Convenience Items ............ 98
Windshield Wipers and Washers .. 74 Beverage Holders ........................ 99
Turn Signals and Headlights .......... 75 Console Compartment ................ 99
Automatic Lighting Off Glove Box ..................................... 99
Feature ...................................... 76 Sunglasses Holder ..................... 100
Daytime Running Lights............. 76 Conversation Mirror ................. 100
Instrument Panel Brightness ......... 76 Sun Visor .................................... 101
Hazard Warning Button .................. 77 Vanity Mirror ............................. 101
Rear Window Defogger .................. 77 Accessory Power Sockets......... 101
Steering Wheel Adjustment ........... 78 Interior Lights ................................ 102
Keys and Locks ................................ 79
Immobilizer System......................... 80
Ignition Switch ................................. 81
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
59
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２０：４２３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００６５

Control Locations
INSTRUMENT PANEL SHIFT LEVER REAR VIEW MIRROR WITH

INDICATORS (P.61) (P.206) COMPASS＊ (P.179) AUDIO SYSTEM
GAUGES(P.70) (P.115)
POWER DOOR LOCK

SWITCH
(P.82)
HEATING/COOLING
SYSTEM
MIRROR CLIMATE CONTROL
CONTROLS SYSTEM
(P.106)
(P.93)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
(P.94)
HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE
(P.190)
FUEL FILL DOOR PARKING BRAKE REAR A/C CONTROL ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
RELEASE HANDLE PEDAL (P.113) (P.101)
(P.189) (P.97)
＊: If equipped.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
60
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２０：５２３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００６６

Instrument Panel
LIGHTS ON INDICATOR (P.69) PARKING BRAKE FOG LIGHT INDICATOR＊ (P.69)

AND BRAKE
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR (P.67) SYSTEM IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
INDICATOR INDICATOR (P.64)
(P.63, 284)
LOW FUEL INDICATOR (P.67)

A/T TEMPERATURE SIDE AIRBAG OFF
INDICATOR＊ (P.68) INDICATOR (P.34, 63)
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST
(VSA) SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P.64) TIRE PRESSURE
MONITORING SYSTEM
VTM-4 INDICATOR＊(P.68) (TPMS) INDICATOR
(P.65)
MALFUNCTION LOW TIRE PRESSURE
INDICATOR LAMP (P.62, 283) INDICATOR (P.65)
BRAKE LAMP
INDICATOR (P.66)
DOOR AND TAILGATE OPEN MONITOR (P.66)
MAINTENANCE MINDER VSA ACTIVATION TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR (P.65)
INDICATOR (P.69) INDICATOR (P.64)
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
FUEL ECONOMY INDICATOR＊ CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR (P.33, 63)
(P.68) INDICATOR (P.67)
SEAT BELT REMINDER INDICATOR (P.21, 62)
CHARGING SYSTEM LOW OIL PRESSURE
INDICATOR (P.62, 282) INDICATOR (P.62, 282) ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) INDICATOR (P.63)
The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.
＊ : If equipped.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
61
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２１：０１３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００６７

Instrument Panel Indicators
The instrument panel has many If your front passenger does not Malfunction Indicator
indicators to give you important fasten their seat belt, the indicator Lamp
information about your vehicle. comes on about 6 seconds after the See page 283 .
ignition switch is turned to the ON
Seat Belt Reminder (II) position. Low Oil Pressure
Indicator Indicator
This indicator comes on when you If either of you do not fasten your The engine can be severely damaged
turn the ignition switch to the ON seat belt while driving, the beeper if this indicator flashes or stays on
(II) position. It reminds you and your will sound and the indicator will flash when the engine is running. For
passengers to fasten your seat belts. again at regular intervals. For more more information, see page 282 .
A beeper also sounds if you have not information, see page 21 .
fastened your seat belt. Charging System
Indicator
If you turn the ignition switch to the If this indicator comes on when the
ON (II) position before fastening engine is running, the battery is not
your seat belt, the beeper sounds being charged. For more information,
and the indicator flashes. If you do see page 282 .
not fasten your seat belt before the
beeper stops, the indicator stops
flashing but remains on.
If you continue driving without

fastening your seat belt, the beeper
sounds and the indicator flashes
again at regular intervals.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
62
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２１：１１３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００６８

Supplemental Restraint U.S. Canada Anti-lock Brake System

System Indicator (ABS) Indicator
This indicator comes on briefly when This indicator normally comes on for
you turn the ignition switch to the Parking Brake and Brake System a few seconds when you turn the
ON (II) position. If it comes on at Indicator ignition switch to the ON (II)
any other time, it indicates a This indicator has two functions: position, and when the ignition

potential problem with your front switch is turned to the START (III)
airbags. This indicator will also alert 1. It comes on when you turn the position. If it comes on at any other
you to a potential problem with your ignition switch to the ON (II) time, there is a problem with the
side airbags, passenger’s side airbag position. It is a reminder to check ABS. If this happens, have your
cutoff system, side curtain airbags, the parking brake. A beeper vehicle checked at a dealer. With
automatic seat belt tensioners, sounds if you drive with the this on, your vehicle still has normal
driver’s seat position sensor, or the parking brake not fully released. braking ability but no anti-lock
front passenger’s weight sensors. Driving with the parking brake not brakes. For more information, see
For more information, see page 33 . fully released can damage the page 217 .
brakes and tires.
U.S. Canada
Side Airbag Off 2. If it stays on after you have fully
Indicator released the parking brake while
This indicator comes on when you the engine is running, or if it
turn the ignition switch to the ON comes on while driving, there
(II) position. If it comes on at any could be a problem with the brake
other time, it indicates that the system. For more information, see
passenger’s side airbag has page 284 .
automatically shut off. For more
information, see page 34 .
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
63
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２１：２１３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００６９

Immobilizer System Vehicle Stability Assist VSA Activation Indicator

Indicator (VSA) System Indicator
This indicator comes on for a few This indicator normally comes on for This indicator has three functions:
seconds when you turn the ignition a few seconds when you turn the
switch to the ON (II) position. It will ignition switch to the ON (II) 1. It comes on as a reminder that you
then go off if you have inserted a position. have turned off the vehicle
properly-coded ignition key. If it is stability assist (VSA) system.
not a properly-coded key, the If it comes on and stays on at any
indicator will blink, and the engine other time, or if it does not come on 2. It flashes when VSA is active (see
will not start (see page 80 ). when you turn the ignition switch to page 218 ).
the ON (II) position, there is a
This indicator also blinks several problem with the VSA system. Take 3. It comes on along with the VSA
times when you turn the ignition your vehicle to a dealer to have it system indicator if there is a
switch from the ON (II) position to checked. Without VSA, your vehicle problem with the VSA system.
the ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0) still has normal driving ability, but
position. will not have VSA traction and This indicator normally comes on for
stability enhancement. See page a few seconds when you turn the
218 for more information on the ignition switch to the ON (II)
VSA system. position. For more information, see
page 218 .
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
64
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２１：３０３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００７０

Low Tire Pressure Tire Pressure Monitor Tire Pressure Monitoring

Indicator System (TPMS) Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for The appropriate tire indicator will This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the come on along with the low tire a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II) pressure indicator if a tire is ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. significantly underinflated or has position.

suddenly lost pressure. See Low
If it comes on while driving, it Tire Pressure Indicator for what to If this indicator comes on and stays
indicates that one or more of your do if this indicator comes on. on at any other time, or if it does not
vehicle’s tires are significantly low come on when you turn the ignition
on pressure. switch to the ON (II) position, there
is a problem with the TPMS. With
If this happens, pull to the side of the this indicator on, the low tire
road when it is safe, check which tire pressure indicator and the tire
has lost the pressure on the tire pressure monitor will not come on
pressure monitor, and determine the when a tire loses pressure. Take the
cause. If it is because of a flat tire, vehicle to your dealer to have the
replace the flat tire with the compact system checked.
spare (see page 272 ), and have the
flat tire repaired as soon as possible.
If two or more tires are underinflated,
call a professional towing service
(see page 285 ). Refer to page
211 for more information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
65
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２１：３８３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００７１

Turn Signal and Brake Lamp Indicator Door and Tailgate Open Monitor
Hazard Warning
Indicators If a brake light does not work, the
The left or right turn signal indicator BRAKE LAMP indicator comes on
blinks when you signal a lane change when you push the brake pedal with
or turn. If an indicator does not blink the ignition switch in the ON (II)
or blinks rapidly, it usually means position.
one of the turn signal bulbs is
burned out (see pages 255 and 258 ). A burned out brake light is a hazard The appropriate indicator comes on
Replace the bulb as soon as possible, when drivers behind you cannot tell in this display if the tailgate or any
since other drivers cannot see that you are braking. Replace the bulb as door is not closed tightly.
you are signaling. soon as possible (see page 258 ).
All of the indicators in the monitor
When you press the hazard warning display come on for a few seconds
button, both turn signal indicators when you turn the ignition switch to
and all turn signals on the outside of the ON (II) position.
the vehicle flash.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
66
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２１：５０３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００７２

Daytime Running Lights High Beam Indicator Low Fuel Indicator

Indicator
Canadian models only This indicator comes on with the
This indicator comes on when you high beam headlights. For more
turn the ignition switch to the ON information, see page 75 .
(II) position with the headlight

switch off and the parking brake set. Canadian models only
It should go off when you turn on the This indicator also comes on with LOW FUEL INDICATOR
headlights or release the parking reduced brightness when the This indicator comes on as a
brake. If it comes on at any other daytime running lights (DRL) are on reminder that you must refuel soon.
time, it means there is a problem (see page 76 ).
with the DRL. There may also be a When the indicator comes on, there
problem with the high beam Washer Level Indicator is about 1.8 U.S. gal (7.0 ) of fuel
headlights. remaining in the tank before the
Canadian models only needle reaches E. There is a small
Cruise Control Indicator This indicator comes on when the reserve of fuel remaining in the tank
washer fluid level is low. Add washer when the needle does reach E.
This indicator comes on when you fluid when you see this indicator
set the cruise control. See page (see page 249 ).
177 for information on operating the
cruise control.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
67
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２２：００３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００７３

A/T Temperature VTM-4 Indicator Fuel Economy Indicator

Indicator
4WD models only 4WD models only 2WD models only
This indicator monitors the This indicator normally comes on for While the engine is operating in its
temperature of the automatic a few seconds when you turn the most economical range, this
transmission fluid. It should come on ignition switch to the ON (II) indicator may come on and stay on.
for a few seconds when you turn the position. If it comes on at any other
ignition switch to the ON (II) time, there is a problem in the 4WD
position. If it comes on while driving, system. Take the vehicle to your
it means the transmission fluid dealer to have it checked.
temperature is too high. Pull to the
side of the road when it is safe, shift If the indicator blinks while driving,
to Park, and let the engine idle until the VTM-4 fluid temperature is too
the indicator goes out. high. Pull to the side of the road
when it is safe, shift to Park, and let
the engine idle until the indicator
goes out.
Continuing to drive with the A/T
temperature indicator on may cause
serious damage to the transmission.
Continuing to drive with the VTM-4
indicator blinking may cause serious
damage to the system.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
68
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２２：０８３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００７４

Lights On Indicator Fog Light Indicator Maintenance Minder

On EX, EX-L, and EX-SE Indicator
This indicator reminds you that the models This indicator comes on for a few
exterior lights are on. It comes on This indicator comes on when you seconds when you turn the ignition
when the light switch is in either the turn on the fog lights. For more switch to the ON (II) position. It
or position. If you turn the information, see page 75 . reminds you that it is time to take

ignition switch to the ACCESSORY your vehicle in for scheduled
(I) or LOCK (0) position without maintenance. The maintenance main
turning off the light switch, this items and sub items will be displayed
indicator will stay on. A reminder in the information display. See page
chime will also sound when you open 237 for more information on the
the driver’s door. maintenance minder.
This indicator goes off when your

dealer resets it after completing the
required maintenance service.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
69
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２２：１８３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００７５

Gauges
TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER FUEL GAUGE TEMPERATURE Odometer

GAUGE This shows the total distance your
vehicle has been driven. It measures
miles in U.S. models and kilometers
in Canadian models.
It is illegal under U.S. federal law and
Canadian provincial regulations to
disconnect, reset, or alter the
odometer with the intent to change
SELECT/RESET the number of miles or kilometers
KNOB indicated.
INFORMATION DISPLAY
U.S. model is shown ODOMETER TRIP METER Fuel Gauge
This shows how much fuel you have.
Trip Meter Each trip meter works independently, It may show slightly more or less
This meter shows the number of so you can keep track of two than the actual amount. The needle
miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) different distances. returns to the bottom after you turn
driven since you last reset it. off the ignition.
To reset a trip meter, display it, and
There are two trip meters: Trip A then press and hold the select/reset
and Trip B. Switch between these knob until the number resets to ‘‘0.0’’.
displays and the outside temperature Avoid driving with an extremely low
display (except LX, LX-VP models) f uel level. Running out of f uel could
by pressing the select/reset knob cause the engine to misf ire, damaging
repeatedly. the catalytic converter.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
70
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２２：２７３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００７６

Gauges
Temperature Gauge Outside Temperature Indicator If the outside temperature is

This shows the temperature of the On EX, EX-L, and EX-SE models incorrectly displayed, you can adjust
engine’s coolant. During normal This indicator displays the outside it up to ±5°F in U.S. models (±3°C
operation, the pointer should rise temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S. in Canadian models) warmer or
from the bottom white mark to about models) or Centigrade (Canadian cooler.
the middle white mark. In severe models). To see the outside NOTE: The temperature must be

driving conditions, such as very hot temperature, press and release the stabilized before doing this
weather or a long period of uphill select/reset knob until the procedure.
driving, the pointer may rise to the temperature is displayed.
upper white mark. If it reaches the Select the outside temperature
red (Hot) mark, pull safely to the The temperature sensor is in the indicator, then press the select/reset
side of the road. Turn to page 248 for front bumper. Therefore, the knob for 10 seconds. The following
instructions and precautions on temperature reading can be affected sequence will appear for 1 second
checking the engine’s cooling by heat reflection from the road each: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, −5, −4, −3, −2,
system. surface, engine heat, and the −1, 0 (U.S.) or 0, 1, 2, 3, −3, −2,
exhaust from surrounding traffic. −1, 0 (Canada).
This can cause an incorrect
temperature reading when your When the temperature reaches the
speed is under 19 mph (30 km/h). desired value, release the select/
reset knob. You should see the new
The sensor delays the display update outside temperature displayed.
until it reaches the correct outside
temperature. This may take several In certain weather conditions,
minutes. temperature readings near freezing
(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is
forming on the road surface.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
71
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２２：３３３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００７７

Gauges
Check Fuel Cap Message If the system still detects a leak in Maintenance Minder Display
Your vehicle’s onboard diagnostic the vehicle’s evaporative emissions The information display in the
system will detect a loose or missing system, the malfunction indicator instrument panel shows you the
fuel fill cap as an evaporative system lamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fill engine oil life and maintenance
leak. The first time a leak is detected cap was not already tightened, turn service items when the ignition
a ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message the engine off, and check or switch is in the ON (II) position. This
appears on the information display. retighten the fuel fill cap until it information helps to keep you aware
clicks at least once. The MIL should of the periodic maintenance your
Turn the engine off, and confirm the go off after several days of normal vehicle needs for continued trouble-
fuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosen driving once the cap is tightened or free driving. Refer to page 237 for
it, then retighten it until it clicks at replaced. If the MIL does not go off, more information.
least once. The message should go have your vehicle inspected by a
off after several days of normal dealer. For more information, see
driving once you tighten or replace page 283 .
the fuel fill cap. To scroll to another
display, press the select/reset knob.
The ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message

will appear each time you restart the
engine until the system turns the
message off.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
72
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２２：３９３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００７８

Controls Near the Steering Wheel
MOONROOF BUTTONS＊2 HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNAL/ HORN＊1 HAZARD WARNING BUTTON

(P.96) FOG LIGHTS＊2 (P.77)
(P.75)
VTM-4 LOCK＊2
LIGHT CONTROL (P.210)
SWITCH

(P.102)
VEHICLE STABILITY PASSENGER AIRBAG

ASSIST (VSA) OFF INDICATOR
SYSTEM OFF SWITCH (P.35)
(P.219)
CRUISE CONTROL REAR WINDOW

MASTER BUTTON DEFOGGER
(P.177) (P.77)
REMOTE AUDIO WINDSHIELD WIPERS/

CONTROLS＊2 WASHERS
(P.140) STEERING WHEEL CRUISE CONTROL (P.74)
ADJUSTMENT BUTTONS
(P.78) (P.177)
＊1 : To use the horn, press the pad around the ‘‘H’’ logo.
＊2 : If equipped.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
73
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２２：４９３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００７９

Windshield Wipers and Washers
OFF − The wipers are not activated. Rear Window Wiper and Washer
INT − The length of the wiper

interval is varied automatically
according to the vehicle’s speed.
Vary the delay by turning the INT
TIME ring. If you turn it to the
shortest delay, the wiper speed
will increase to low speed
operation when the vehicle speed
exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).
LO − The wipers run at low speed.

1. MIST
2. OFF HI − The wipers run at high speed. 1. Rotate the switch clockwise to
3. INT − Intermittent turn the rear window wiper ON.
4. LO − Low speed Windshield Washers − Pull the 2. Hold past ON to turn the rear
5. HI − High speed wiper control lever toward you, window wiper on and to spray the
6. Windshield washers and hold it. The washers spray rear window washer.
until you release the lever. The 3. OFF
Push the right lever up or down to wipers run at low speed, then 4. Rotate the switch
select a position. complete one more sweep after counterclockwise also to spray the
you release the lever. window washer and turn the wiper
MIST − The wipers run at high on.
speed until you release the lever.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
74
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２２：５８３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００８０

Turn Signals and Headlights
Turn Signal − Push down on the High Beams − Push the lever
lever to signal a left turn and up to forward until you hear a click. The
signal a right turn. To signal a lane high beam indicator will come on
change, push lightly on the lever, (see page 67 ). Pull the lever back to
and hold it. The lever will return to return to the low beams.
center when you release it or

complete a turn. To flash the high beams, pull the
lever back lightly, then release it.
Headlights − Turning the switch The high beams will stay on as long
on the left lever to the position as you hold the lever back.
turns on the parking lights, taillights,
instrument panel lights, side-marker Fog Lights
lights, and rear license plate lights. On EX, EX-L, and EX-SE models
Turning the switch to the Turn the fog lights on and off by
1. Turn signal position turns on the turning the switch next to the
2. Off headlights. If you leave the lights on headlight switch.
3. Parking and indicator lights with the ignition switch in the
4. Headlights ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0) You can use the fog lights only when
5. High beams position, you will hear a reminder the headlights are on low beam.
6. Flash high beams chime when you open the driver’s
7. Fog lights off (if equipped) door.
8. Fog lights on (if equipped)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
75
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２３：０７３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００８１

Headlights, Instrument Panel Brightness
Automatic Lighting Off Feature The lights will turn on again when Instrument Panel Brightness
On EX, EX-L, and EX-SE models you unlock or open the driver’s door.
The automatic lighting off feature SELECT/RESET KNOB
turns off the headlights, all other If you unlock the door, but do not
exterior lights, and the instrument open it within 15 seconds, the lights
panel lights within 15 seconds of go off. With the driver’s door open,
removing the key from the ignition you will hear a lights-on reminder
switch and closing the driver’s door. chime.
This feature activates if you leave Daytime Running Lights

the headlight switch in the or (Canadian Models)
position, remove the key, then With the headlight switch off, the
open and close the driver’s door. high beam headlights come on with
reduced brightness when you turn
If you remove the key from the the ignition switch to the ON (II) The select/reset knob on the
ignition switch with the headlight position and release the parking instrument panel controls the
switch on, but do not open the door, brake. They remain on until you turn brightness of the instrument panel
the lights will turn off after 10 the ignition switch off, even if you lights. Turn the knob to adjust the
minutes. set the parking brake. brightness.
The headlights revert to normal

operation when you turn them on
with the switch.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
76
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２３：１４３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００８２

Hazard Warning Button, Rear Window Defogger
Hazard Warning Button Rear Window Defogger

HAZARD WARNING BUTTON EX, EX-L, and EX-SE models LX and LX-VP models

Push the button to turn on the The rear window defogger will clear Make sure the rear window is clear
hazard warning lights (four-way fog, frost, and thin ice from the and you have good visibility before
flashers). This causes all four window. Push the defogger button to starting to drive.
outside turn signals and both turn turn it on and off. The indicator
indicators in the instrument panel to above the button comes on to show The defogger wires on the inside of
flash. Use the hazard warning lights the defogger is on. If you do not turn the rear window can be accidentally
if you need to park in a dangerous it off, the defogger will shut itself off damaged. When cleaning the glass,
area near heavy traffic, or if your after about 15 minutes. It also shuts always wipe side-to-side.
vehicle is disabled. off when you turn off the ignition
switch. You have to turn the
defogger on again when you restart
the vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
77
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２３：２０３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００８３

Steering Wheel Adjustment
Make any steering wheel adjustment 3. Push the lever up to lock the
before you start driving. steering wheel in position.
4. Make sure you have securely

locked the steering wheel in place
Adjusting the steering wheel by trying to move it up and down.
position while driving may
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured
in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only LEVER

when the vehicle is stopped.
1. Push the lever under the steering
column all the way down.
2. Move the steering wheel so it

points to your chest, not toward
your face. Make sure you can see
the instrument panel gauges and
indicators.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
78
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２３：２７３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００８４

Keys and Locks
MASTER KEYS WITH You should have received a key These keys contain electronic
REMOTE TRANSMITTER number tag with your keys. You will circuits that are activated by the
KEY NUMBER VALET KEY need this key number if you ever immobilizer system. They will not
TAG (GRAY) have to get a lost key replaced. Use work to start the engine if the
only Honda-approved key blanks. circuits are damaged.

Protect the keys from direct
sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.
Do not drop the keys or set heavy

objects on them.
The master key fits all the locks on Keep the keys away from liquids.
your vehicle. The valet key works If they get wet, dry them
only in the ignition and the driver’s immediately with a soft cloth.
door lock. You can keep the glove
box locked when you leave your The valet key does not contain a
vehicle and the valet key at a parking battery. Do not try to take it apart.
facility.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
79
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２３：３５３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００８５

Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system protects The system may not recognize your As required by the FCC:
your vehicle from theft. If an key’s coding if another immobilizer This device complies with Part 15 of the
improperly-coded key (or other key or other metal object (i.e. key FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
device) is used, the engine will not fob) is near the ignition switch when following two conditions: (1) This device
start. you insert the key. may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
When you turn the ignition switch to If the system repeatedly does not interference received, including
the ON (II) position, the immobilizer recognize the coding of your key, interference that may cause undesired
system indicator should come on for contact your dealer. operation.
a few seconds, then go off. If the
indicator starts to blink, it means the Do not attempt to alter this system Changes or modifications not expressly
system does not recognize the or add other devices to it. Electrical approved by the party responsible for
coding of the key. Turn the ignition problems could result that may make compliance could void the user’s
switch to the LOCK (0) position, your vehicle undrivable. authority to operate the equipment.
remove the key, reinsert it, and turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II) If you have lost your key and you This device complies with Industry
position again. cannot start the engine, contact your Canada Standard RSS-210.
dealer. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
Always take the ignition key with you undesired operation of the device.
whenever you leave the vehicle alone.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
80
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２３：４３３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００８６

Ignition Switch
If the front wheels are turned, the You will hear a reminder beeper if
anti-theft lock may make it difficult you leave the key in the LOCK (0) or
to turn the key. Firmly turn the the ACCESSORY (I) position and
steering wheel to the left or right as open the driver’s door. Remove the
you turn the key. key to turn off the beeper.

ACCESSORY (I) − You can The shift lever must be in Park
operate the audio system and the before you can remove the key from
accessory power sockets in this the ignition switch.
position.
ON (II) − This is the normal key

position when driving. Several of the
The ignition switch has four indicators on the instrument panel
positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY come on as a test when you turn the
(I), ON (II), and START (III). ignition switch from the
ACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)
LOCK (0) − You can insert or position.
remove the key only in this position.
To turn the key, the shift lever must START (III) − Use this position
be in Park, and you must push the only to start the engine. The switch
key in slightly. returns to the ON (II) position when
you let go of the key.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
81
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２３：５３３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００８７

Door Locks
Power Door Locks The lock tab on any door locks and Tailgate
unlocks that door. To unlock the
MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH driver’s door from the outside, turn
the key and release it. If you turn
and hold it, all doors and the tailgate
unlock.
Lockout Prevention
With the driver’s door open and the
key in the ignition, both master door
lock switches are disabled. They are
not disabled if the driver’s door is
LOCK TAB closed. Pushing the switch down on
the open passenger’s door will lock
To lock the doors and the tailgate, all doors and the tailgate. To open the tailgate, pull the handle,
press the master door lock switch on then lift up. To close the tailgate, use
either front door, press the lock tab the inner handle to pull it down, then
down on the driver’s door, or use the press down on the back edge.
key on the outside lock on the driver’s
door. Keep the tailgate and the hatch glass
closed at all times while driving to
Pressing up on either master door avoid damaging the tailgate and the
lock switch will unlock all of the hatch glass, and to prevent exhaust
doors and the tailgate. gas from getting into the interior.
See Carbon Monoxide Hazard on
page 57 .
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
82
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２４：０１３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００８８

Childproof Door Locks, Remote Transmitter
Childproof Door Locks Remote Transmitter UNLOCK − Press this button once
to unlock the driver’s door. Push it
PANIC UNLOCK twice to unlock the other doors and
BUTTON BUTTON the tailgate. Some exterior lights will
flash twice each time you press the
button.

Unlock
When you press the UNLOCK
button, the front and rear individual
LOCK LED map lights, depending on the interior
BUTTON
Lock light control switch position, will
come on (see page 102 ). If you do
LOCK LEVER not open any door, the lights stay on
for about 30 seconds, then go out. If
The childproof door locks are LOCK − Press this button once to you relock the doors and the tailgate
designed to prevent children seated lock all doors and the tailgate. Some with the remote transmitter before
in the rear from accidentally opening exterior and interior lights will flash. 30 seconds have elapsed, the lights
the rear doors. Each rear door has a When you push LOCK twice within 5 will go off immediately.
lock lever near the edge. With the seconds, you will hear a beep to
lever in the LOCK position, the door verify that the security system has If you do not open any door or the
cannot be opened from inside set. You cannot lock it if any door is tailgate within 30 seconds, they will
regardless of the position of the lock not fully closed or the key is in the automatically relock, and the
tab. To open the door, pull the lock ignition switch. security system (if equipped) will
tab up, and use the outside door reset.
handle.
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
83
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２４：１１３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００８９

Remote Transmitter
PANIC − Press this button for Replacing the Transmitter Battery

about 1 second to attract attention; If it takes several pushes on the
the horn will sound and the exterior button to lock or unlock the doors,
lights will flash for about 30 seconds. replace the battery as soon as
To cancel panic mode, press any possible.
other button on the remote
transmitter, or turn the ignition Battery type: CR1616
switch to the ON (II) position.
Remote Transmitter Care

Avoid dropping or throwing the
transmitter. SCREW
Protect the transmitter from To replace the battery:

extreme temperature.
1. Remove the screw at the base of
Do not immerse the transmitter in the transmitter with a small
any liquid. Phillips-head screwdriver.
If you lose a transmitter, the 2. Separate the transmitter by prying

replacement needs to be its middle seam with your
reprogrammed by your dealer. fingernail.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
84
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２４：１８３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００９０

Remote Transmitter
An improperly disposed of battery As required by the FCC:

can hurt the environment. This device complies with Part 15 of the
Always confirm local regulations for FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
battery disposal. following two conditions: (1) This device
BATTERY may not cause harmful interference, and
5. Install the parts in reverse order. (2) this device must accept any

interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly

TAB approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
3. Inside the transmitter, separate authority to operate the equipment.
the inner cover from the keypad
by releasing the two tabs on the This device complies with Industry
cover. Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
4. Remove the old battery from the conditions: (1) this device may not cause
back of the inner cover, and insert interference, and (2) this device must
a new battery into the back of the accept any interference that may cause
cover with the ＋ side facing down. undesired operation of the device.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
85
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２４：２７３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００９１

Seat Heaters
If equipped In the HI setting, the heater turns off

when the seat gets warm, and turns
SEAT HEATER BUTTONS SEAT HEATER BUTTONS back on after the seat’s temperature
drops.
In the LO setting, the heater runs
continuously. It does not cycle with
temperature changes.
Follow these precautions whenever

you use the seat heaters:
Use the HI setting only to heat the

seats quickly, because it draws
large amounts of current from the
Both front seats are equipped with Push the top of the switch, HI, to battery.
seat heaters. Because of the sensors rapidly heat up the seat. After the
for the side airbag cutoff system, seat reaches a comfortable If the engine is left idling for an
there is no heater in the passenger’s temperature, select LO by pushing extended period, do not use the
seat-back. The ignition switch must the bottom of the switch. This will seat heaters, even on the LO
be ON (II) to use the heaters. keep the seat warm. setting. It can weaken the battery,
causing hard starting.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
86
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２４：３６３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００９２

Seats
Power Seat Adjustments Raises or lowers the

On EX, EX-L, and EX-SE models seat.
See pages 13 − 14 for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position the seats and seat- Adjusts the seat-back
backs. angle forward or

backward.
The controls for the adjustable
driver’s power seat are on the
outside edge of the seat bottom. You
can adjust the power seat with the
ignition switch in any position. Make
all seat adjustments before you start
driving.
Moves the seat
Moving the long horizontal switch forward and backward.
adjusts the seat bottom in several
directions. The seat bottom adjusts
in the direction you move the switch. Moves the front of the
The short vertical switch adjusts the seat up or down and
seat-back angle. the rear of the seat up
or down.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
87
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２４：４３３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００９３

Seats
Driver’s Lumbar Support Manual Seat Adjustments

On EX, EX-L, and EX-SE models
To adjust the seat forward and To change the seat-back angle of the
To change the lumbar support, move backward, pull up on the lever under front seat, pull up the lever on the
the lever on the right side of the the front seat cushion. Then try to outside of the seat bottom.
seat-back forward or backward. move the seat to make sure it is
Keep moving the lever forward or locked into position.
backward until you find a suitable
position.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
88
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２４：５４３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００９４

Seats
Driver’s Seat Height Adjustment Adjusting the Second Row Seats Folding the Second Row Seats
On LX and LX-VP models The left and right halves can be
folded separately.
1. If you are folding the left half of

the seat, use the ignition key to

release the center seat belt from
the detachable anchor (see page
18 ).
2. Lower the head restraint to its

SECOND lowest position.
ROW SEAT
3. Pull up the handle on the outside
To change the angle of the seats in of the seat-back.
The height of your driver’s seat is the second row seat-backs, pull up
adjustable. Turn the front dial on the the handle on the seat-back. Moving 4. Fold the seat-back forward.
outside of the seat cushion to raise the short vertical switch forward or
the front of the seat bottom, and turn backward adjusts the seat back in Reverse this procedure to return the
the rear dial to raise the rear. those directions. seat to its upright position. Make
sure the seat is locked and secured
To adjust the seats forward and before driving.
backward, pull up on the lever under
the seat cushion. After moving the
seat, make sure it is locked into
position.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
89
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２５：０３３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００９５

Seats
Third Seat Access Adjusting the Third Row Seat Folding the Third Row Seat
THIRD ROW
RELEASE LEVER SEAT HANDLE
To get into the third row seats, pull Pull on the handle on the back of the 1. Remove the head restraints by
up the lever on the side of the seat-back, move the seat-back to the pushing the release buttons and
passenger’s side second row seat- desired position, and release the pulling the restraints out.
back. The seat-back will tilt forward, handle. Let the seat-back latch in the
and then can be slid forward. new position. 2. Store the head restraints under
the cargo area floor. Insert the
Push the whole seat backwards until legs into the holes in the sides of
it fully latches. Make sure the seat is the storage compartment.
locked and secured before driving.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
90
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２５：１２３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００９６

Seats
3. Use the ignition key to release the Head Restraints

seat belt from the detachable See page 15 for important safety
anchor (see page 18 ). information and a warning about
improperly positioning head restraints.
4. Unlock the seat-back by pulling
the handle. Push the seat-back Your vehicle is equipped with head

forward. restraints in all seating positions to
help protect you and your
Make sure you clip the small latch passengers from whiplash and other
plate of each outer shoulder belt to injuries.
the seat belt webbing whenever the
third seat is folded.
Reverse this procedure to return the They are most effective when you
seat to its upright position. adjust them so the center of the back
of the occupant’s head rests against
Reinstall the head restraints, the center of the restraint.
reconnect the seat belts, and make
sure the seats are secured before
driving.
Make sure all items in the cargo area

are secured. Loose items can fly
forward and cause injury if you have
to brake hard (See Carrying Cargo
on page 198 ). CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
91
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２５：２０３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００９７

Seats, Mirrors
To remove one for cleaning or repair, Mirrors

push the release button, and lift the
restraint up.
Failure to reinstall the head

restraints can result in severe
injury during a crash.
Always replace the head TAB

RELEASE BUTTON restraints before driving.
The head restraints adjust for height.

You need both hands to adjust a Make sure the head restraint locks Keep the inside and outside mirrors
restraint. Do not attempt to adjust it in position when you reinstall it. clean and adjusted for best visibility.
while driving. To raise it, pull upward. Be sure to adjust the mirrors before
To lower the restraint, push the you start driving.
release button sideways, and push
the restraint down. The inside mirror has day and night
positions. The night position reduces
glare from headlights behind you.
Flip the tab on the bottom edge of
the mirror to select the day or night
position.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
92
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２５：２７３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００９８

Mirrors
If equipped Adjusting the Power Mirrors 3. Push the appropriate edge of the
The rear view mirror has a compass adjustment switch to move the
function to indicate the vehicle’s SELECTOR SWITCH mirror right, left, up, or down.
direction.
Refer to Compass on page 179 . 4. When you finish, move the
selector switch to the center (off)

position. This turns the
adjustment switch off to keep your
settings.
ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON

(II) position.
2. Move the selector switch to L

(driver’s side) or R (passenger’s
side).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
93
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２５：３６３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０００９９

Mirrors, Power Windows
Power Mirror Heaters Power Windows

If equipped
DRIVER’S WINDOW MAIN SWITCH Closing a power window on
SWITCH
someone’s hands or fingers can
cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are

away from the windows before
closing them.
AUTO − To open the driver’s

window fully, push the window
switch firmly down, then release it.
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON The window automatically goes
Turn the ignition switch to the ON down all the way. To stop the
The outside mirrors are heated to (II) position to raise or lower any window from going all the way down,
remove fog and frost. With the window. To open a window, push the pull back on the window switch
ignition switch in the ON (II) switch down and hold it. Release the briefly.
position, turn on the heaters by switch when you want the window to
pressing the button. The indicator in stop. Pull back on the switch and To close the driver’s window fully,
the button comes on as a reminder. hold it to close the window. pull back the window switch firmly,
Press the button again to turn the then release it. The window
heaters off. The windows will operate for up to automatically goes all the way up. To
10 minutes after you turn off the stop the window from going all the
ignition switch. Opening either front way up, push down on the window
door cancels this function. switch briefly.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
94
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２５：４３３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１００

Power Windows
To open or close the driver’s window AUTO REVERSE − If the driver’s If your vehicle’s battery is
partially, push down or pull back on window senses any obstacle while it disconnected or goes dead, or the
the window switch lightly and hold it. is closing automatically, it will driver’s window fuse is removed, the
The window will stop when you reverse direction, and then stop. To AUTO function may be disabled. If
release the switch. close the window, remove the this happens, the power window
obstacle, then use the window switch system will need to be reset after

If the MAIN switch is OFF, the again. reconnecting the battery or installing
passenger windows cannot be raised the fuse.
or lowered. Keep the MAIN switch Auto reverse stops sensing when the
off when you have children in the window is almost closed. You should 1. Start the engine. Push down and
vehicle so they do not injure always check that all passengers and hold the driver’s window switch
themselves by operating the objects are away from the window until the window is fully open.
windows unintentionally. before closing it.
2. Pull and hold the driver’s window
switch to close the window
completely, then hold the switch
for about 2 seconds.
If the power windows do not operate

properly after resetting, have your
vehicle checked by your dealer.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
95
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２５：５１３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１０１

Moonroof
If equipped To tilt up the back of the moonroof, The moonroof has a key-off delay
press and hold the center button function. You can still open and close
CLOSE BUTTON . To close the moonroof, press the moonroof for up to 10 minutes
and hold the upper button . To after you turn off the ignition switch.
open the moonroof, press and hold The key-off delay function cancels as
the lower button . Release the soon as you open either front door.
button when the moonroof gets to You must then turn the ignition
the desired position. Make sure switch to the ON (II) position to
TILT-UP everyone’s hands are away from the operate the moonroof.
BUTTON moonroof before opening or closing
it.
OPEN BUTTON If you try to open the moonroof in

below-f reezing temperatures, or when
The moonroof has two positions: it Opening or closing the it is covered with snow or ice, you can
can be tilted up in the back for moonroof on someone’s hands damage the moonroof panel or motor.
ventilation, or it can be slid back into or fingers can cause serious
the roof. Use the switch under the injury.
left dashboard vent to operate the
moonroof. The ignition switch must Make sure all hands and fingers
be in the ON (II) position. are clear of the moonroof
before opening or closing it.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
96
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２５：５６３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１０２

Parking Brake
Driving the vehicle with the parking

brake applied can damage the rear
brakes and axles. A beeper will sound
if the vehicle is driven with the parking

brake on.
PARKING BRAKE PEDAL
To apply the parking brake, push the

pedal down with your foot. To
release it, push on the pedal again.
The parking brake indicator on the
instrument panel should go out when
the parking brake is fully released
(see page 63 ).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
97
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２６：００３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１０３

Interior Convenience Items
SUNGLASS HOLDER WITH SUN VISOR VANITY MIRROR ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS
CONVERSATION MIRROR＊
SUN VISOR
VANITY MIRROR
GLOVE BOX
BEVERAGE HOLDERS
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
BEVERAGE HOLDERS＊ BEVERAGE HOLDERS ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
＊ : If equipped.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
98
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２６：１０３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１０４

Beverage Holders Console Compartment Glove Box

Open the glove box by pulling the
bottom of the handle. Close it with a
firm push. Lock or unlock the glove
box with the master key.

The glove box light comes on when
the parking lights are on.
An open glove box can cause

serious injury to your passenger
Be careful when you are using the in a crash, even if the
beverage holders. A spilled liquid To open the console compartment, passenger is wearing the seat
that is very hot can scald you or your pull up on the lever, and lift the lid. belt.
passengers. Liquid can also spill
from the rear door pocket beverage Pivot the door of the console forward Always keep the glove box
holders when you close the rear and you can store a cellular phone, a closed while driving.
doors. Use only resealable small notepad, and business cards in
containers in the door pockets. The it.
front beverage holders can be
installed under the slide.
Spilled liquids can damage the
upholstery, carpeting, and electrical
components in the interior.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
99
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２６：１７３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１０５

Sunglasses Holder Conversation Mirror
Push
SUNGLASSES HOLDER
To open the sunglasses holder, push You may also store small items in On EX-L, EX-SE, and Canadian EX
on the front edge. Make sure the this holder. Make sure they are models
holder is closed while you are driving. small enough to let the holder close The sunglasses holder uses a convex
and latch, and that they are not mirror for its bottom panel. You can
Some larger styles of sunglasses heavy enough to cause the holder to see all the vehicle passengers in this
may not fit in the holder. pop open while driving. mirror. To use the mirror, open the
sunglasses holder fully, push it to the
first detent, and release it.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
100
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２６：２６３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１０６

Sun Visor Vanity Mirror Accessory Power Sockets

Each socket is intended to supply
EXTENSION power for 12 volt DC accessories
that are rated 120 watts or less (10
amps).

None of the sockets will power an
automotive type cigarette lighter
element. When both sockets are
being used, the combined power
rating of the accessories should be
120 watts or less (10 amps).
SUN VISOR
When using the sun visor for the To use the vanity mirror on the back
side window, remove the support rod of the sun visor, pull up the cover.
from the clip and swing it out. Slide
the extension out to get more The light comes on when you pull up
coverage on the side window. the cover.
Make sure you put the sun visor The vanity mirror light will not come
back in place when you are getting on if the sun visor is slid outward.
into or out of the vehicle. Do not use
the extended sun visor over the rear
view mirror.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
101
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２６：３７３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１０７

Interior Convenience Items, Interior Lights
AC Power Outlet The maximum capacity for this Light Control Switch
If equipped power outlet is 115 volt AC at 100
watts or less. If you use an appliance
which requires more than 100 watts,
it automatically stops supplying the
power. If this happens, turn the ON
ignition switch off and turn it on
again.
NOTE: The AC power outlet is not

designed for electric appliances DOOR
which require high initial peak ACTIVATED
wattage such as cathode-ray tube POSITION OFF
type televisions, refrigerators,
electric pumps, etc. It is also not When this switch is in the ON position:
There is a 115 volt AC power outlet suitable for devices that process All the individual map lights come
in the console compartment. To use precise data such as medical on and stay on as long as the
the AC power outlet, open the equipment or measuring instruments. switch remains in the ON position.
console compartment lid and open Any appliances that require an
the outlet cover. Insert the plug into extremely stable power supply such When the switch is in the OFF position:
the receptacle slightly, turn it 90° as microcomputer-controlled electric None of the lights come on when a
clockwise, then push in the plug all blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc., door or the tailgate is opened.
the way. should not be connected to this
outlet. The individual map lights in the
Always run the engine when you use front can be turned on and off with
the AC power outlet. the switches next to the lights.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
102
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２６：４８３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１０８

Interior Lights
The individual map lights in the Individual Map Lights Courtesy Lights
second and third rows cannot be Turn on the front and rear individual
turned on. map lights by pushing the lens of
each light. Push the lens again to
When the switch is in the door activated turn it off. You can also operate
position: these lights with the light control

The individual map lights come on switch (see page 102 ).
when any door or the tailgate is
opened, or when the remote Tailgate Light
transmitter is used to unlock the The light in the tailgate has an on-off
doors. switch to control if the light comes
on when the tailgate is opened.
The individual map lights in the
second and third rows can be Individual Interior Lights
turned on and off by pressing the The courtesy lights in the front The courtesy light between the map
lens. doors and around the ignition switch lights comes on when you turn the
come on when you open any door. parking lights on. To adjust its
The tailgate light comes on when After you close the door, the ignition brightness, turn the select/reset
you open the tailgate if the light switch light stays on for several knob on the instrument panel.
switch is in the ON position. seconds.
The lights go out about 6 seconds

after all the doors and the tailgate
are closed. With any door or the
tailgate left open, the lights stay
on about 3 minutes, then go out.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
103
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２６：５０３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１０９
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
104
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２６：５５３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１１０
Main Menu
Features
The heating and air conditioning Vents, Heating, and A/C .............. 106
system in your vehicle provides a Automatic Climate Control....... 112
comfortable driving environment in Using the Rear A/C Unit .......... 113
all weather conditions. Audio System ................................. 115
Playing the Radio ........................... 117
The standard audio system has Radio Reception ............................. 122
many features. This section Playing the XM Satellite Radio .. 124
describes those features and how to Playing a Disc ................................. 130
Features
use them. Disc Changer ......................... 131, 134
Protecting Your Discs ................... 135
Except for LX models Disc Player Error Messages ........ 138
Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio Disc Changer Error
system that requires a code number Messages .................................... 139
to enable it. Remote Audio Controls................. 140
Radio Theft Protection.................. 141
The security system helps to dis- Setting the Clock ........................... 142
courage vandalism and theft of your Rear Entertainment System ......... 144
vehicle. Security System ............................. 176
Cruise Control ................................ 177
Compass.......................................... 179
Rear View Camera and Monitor .. 182
HomeLink Universal
Transceiver................................. 183
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
105
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２７：０１３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１１１

Vents, Heating, and A/C
TEMPERATURE RECIRCULATION REAR WINDOW FAN CONTROL

CONTROL DIAL BUTTON DEFOGGER BUTTON DIAL
LX and LX-VP MODELS
TEMPERATURE FAN CONTROL

DISPLAY BUTTONS
AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON FAN SPEED
INDICATOR
MODE CONTROL DIAL MODE BUTTON
EX, EX-L, and EX-SE MODELS
REAR A/C OFF BUTTON RECIRCULATION WINDSHIELD

MANUAL BUTTON BUTTON DEFROST
BUTTON
AUTO BUTTON TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER BUTTON
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
106
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２７：１２３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１１２

Voice Control System Temperature Control Dial RR A/C MANUAL Button

On vehicles with navigation system Turning this dial clockwise increases On EX, EX-L, and EX-SE models
The climate control system can also the temperature of the airflow. Press the RR A/C MANUAL button
be operated by voice control. See the to adjust the temperature of the rear
Navi section in your quick start On EX, EX-L, and EX-SE models passenger compartment
guide for an overview of this system, The temperature setting is shown in independently. See page 113 for
and the navigation system manual the display. information using the rear A/C unit.
for complete details.
Features
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
On EX, EX-L and EX-SE models, see This button turns the air
page 112 for information on conditioning on and off. On LX and
automatic climate control and semi- LX-VP models, the indicator in the
automatic operation. button is on when the A/C is on. On
EX, EX-L, and EX-SE models, you
Fan Control will see A/C ON or A/C OFF in the
On LX and LX-VP models display.
Turn the dial clockwise to increase
the fan speed and airflow. Turn the On EX, EX-L, and EX-SE models
dial counterclockwise to decrease it. When you turn the A/C off, the
system cannot regulate the inside
On EX, EX-L, and EX-SE models temperature if you set the dial below
Select the fan speed by pressing the the outside air temperature.
fan control buttons ( or ).
The fan speed is shown in vertical
bars on the display.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
107
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２７：２８３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１１３

Recirculation Button Rear Window Defogger Button Airflow is divided between

When the indicator in the button is This button turns the rear window the floor vents and the defroster
on, air from the vehicle’s interior is defogger off and on (see page 77 ). vents at the base of the windshield.
sent throughout the system again.
When the indicator is off, air is Mode Control Air flows from the defroster
brought in from the outside of the Use the mode control dial or button vents at the base of the windshield.
vehicle (fresh air mode). to select the vents the air flows from.
Some air will flow from the On LX and LX-VP models
The outside air intakes for the dashboard corner vents in all modes. When you select or ,
heating and cooling system are at the system automatically switches to
the base of the windshield. Keep this On EX, EX-L, and EX-SE models fresh air mode and turns on the A/C.
area clear of leaves and other debris. Each time you press the MODE In this case, you cannot turn the A/C
button, the display shows the mode off.
The system should be left in fresh selected.
air mode under almost all conditions. When you select , the system
Keeping the system in recirculation Air flows from the center automatically switches to fresh air
mode, particularly with the A/C off, and corner vents in the dashboard. mode and turns on the A/C.
can cause the windows to fog up.
Airflow is divided between On EX, EX-L, and EX-SE models
Switch to recirculation mode when the vents in the dashboard and the When you select , the system
driving through dusty or smoky floor vents. automatically switches to fresh air
conditions, then return to fresh air mode and turns on the A/C.
mode. Air flows from the floor
vents.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
108
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２７：４２３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１１４

MAX A/C Ventilation Using the A/C

On LX and LX-VP models The flow-through ventilation system Air conditioning places an extra load
The system automatically draws in outside air, circulates it on the engine. Watch the engine
turns on the A/C and switches to through the interior, then discharges coolant temperature gauge (see page
recirculation mode. Air flows from it through vents near the tailgate. 71 ). If it moves near the red zone,
the center and side vents in the turn off the A/C until the gauge
dashboard. In this mode, you cannot 1. Set the temperature to the lower reading returns to normal.
turn off the A/C and also cannot limit.
Features
switch to fresh air mode. 2. Make sure the A/C is off. 1. Turn on the A/C by pressing the
3. Select and fresh air mode. button. The indicator in the button
When you switch to from 4. Set the fan to the desired speed. comes on when a fan speed is
, the A/C stays on, and you selected (LX and LX-VP models),
can turn it on and off manually. Using the Heater or the display shows A/C ON (EX,
The heater uses engine coolant to EX-L, and EX-SE models).
When you switch to another mode, warm the air. If the engine is cold, it 2. Make sure the temperature is set
the A/C returns to its original setting, will be several minutes before you to maximum cool.
either on or off, as displayed by the feel warm air coming from the 3. Select .
A/C indicator. system. 4. If the outside air is humid, select
recirculation mode. If the outside
1. Select and fresh air mode. air is dry, select fresh air mode.
2. Set the fan to the desired speed. 5. Set the fan to the desired speed.
3. Adjust the warmth of the air with
the temperature control dial.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
109
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２７：５２３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１１５

If the interior is very warm, you can To Dehumidify the Interior To Defog and Defrost
cool it down more rapidly by partially Air conditioning, as it cools, removes To remove fog from the inside of the
opening the windows, turning on the moisture from the air. When used in windows:
A/C, and setting the fan to combination with the heater, it
maximum speed in fresh air mode. makes the interior warm and dry and 1. Set the fan to the desired speed, or
can prevent the windows from high for faster defrosting.
NOTE: The vehicle has two A/C fogging up. 2. Select . The system
units, one is in the front, and the automatically switches to fresh air
other is in the rear. The LX and 1. Turn the fan on. mode and turns on the A/C. The
LX-VP units are independently 2. Turn on the air conditioning. A/C indicator (LX and LX-VP
controlled. The EX, EX-L, and EX-SE 3. Select and fresh air mode. models) or the A/C ON indicator
units are controlled by the front 4. Adjust the temperature control in the display (EX, EX-L, and
panel controls, unless the RR A/C dial to your preference. EX-SE models) will not be
MANUAL button is selected. displayed if it was previously off.
This setting is suitable for all driving 3. Adjust the temperature control
On LX and LX-VP models conditions whenever the outside dial so the airflow feels warm.
To cool the interior with MAX A/C: temperature is above 32°F (0°C). 4. Select to help clear the
1. Set the fan to the desired speed. rear window.
2. Select MAX A/C.
The system automatically turns on
the A/C, selects , and
switches to recirculation mode.
3. Make sure the temperature is set
to maximum cool.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
110
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２８：００３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１１６

On LX and LX-VP models To Remove Exterior Frost or Ice For your safety, make sure you have
When you switch to , from From the Windows a clear view through all the windows
or , the A/C stays on. 1. Select . The system before driving.
This helps prevent the windows from automatically switches to fresh air
rapidly fogging up when the air is mode and turns on the A/C. The
suddenly routed away from the A/C indicator (LX and LX-VP
windshield. If you want to turn the models) or the A/C ON indicator
A/C off, press and release the A/C in the display (EX, EX-L, and
Features
button until the indicator in the EX-SE models) will not be
button comes on and then goes off. displayed if it was previously off.
2. Select .
On EX, EX-L, and EX-SE models 3. Set the fan and temperature
When you press again or the controls to maximum level.
MODE button, the A/C returns to its
original setting, either on or off, as To clear the windows faster, you can
displayed by the A/C ON or A/C close the dashboard corner vents by
OFF indicator. If the original setting rotating the wheel below it. This will
is A/C OFF, the system switches to send more warm air to the
AUTO. windshield defroster vents.
Continuous use of the recirculation
mode can cause humidity to build up
inside the vehicle. Once the
windshield is clear, select the fresh
air mode to avoid fogging the
windows.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
111
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２８：１１３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１１７

Automatic Climate Control When you set the temperature to its Semi-automatic Operation
On EX, EX-L, and EX-SE models lower limit (Lo) or its upper limit You can manually select various
The automatic climate control (Hi), the system runs at full cooling functions of the climate control
system adjusts the fan speed and or heating only. It does not regulate system when it is in FULL AUTO.
airflow levels to maintain the interior the interior temperature. All other features remain
temperature you select. automatically controlled. Making any
In cold weather, the fan will not manual selection causes the word
1. Press the AUTO button. come on automatically until the FULL in the display to go out.
2. Set the desired temperature by heater starts to develop warm air.
turning the temperature control To Turn Everything Off
dial. You will see FULL AUTO in Rear A/C Control − When the On LX and LX-VP models
the system’s display. system is in FULL AUTO, the rear Turning the fan control dial to the
A/C passenger control dial cannot off position shuts the system off.
The system automatically selects the be used. Pressing the button disables
proper mix of conditioned and/or the FULL AUTO function. On EX, EX-L, and EX-SE models
heated air that will, as quickly as If you press OFF, the climate control
possible, raise or lower the interior system shuts off completely.
temperature to your preference.
Keep the system completely off
for short periods only.
To keep stale air and mustiness

from collecting, you should have
the fan running at all times.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
112
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２８：２０３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１１８

Using the Rear A/C Unit On LX and LX-VP models On EX, EX-L, and EX-SE models
On LX and LX-VP models
A passenger in the second row can COOL AIR WARM AIR
use the rear fan control dial to adjust
the amount of airflow to the rear
passenger compartment.
Features
Press the RR A/C MANUAL button
to enable the rear temperature
control dial; a second row passenger
can now adjust the temperature in
the rear passenger compartment REAR A/C MANUAL BUTTON
with the rear temperature control
dial. OFF (center) − The rear A/C unit When the RR A/C MANUAL button
shuts off. is on, you can adjust the temperature
of the rear passenger compartment
Cool Air − Turn this dial manually from the second row seat.
counterclockwise to increase the
airflow. When the RR A/C MANUAL button
is off, the temperature in the rear
Warm Air − Turn this dial clockwise passenger compartment is controlled
to increase the airflow. by the front passenger with front
control panel.
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
113
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２８：２７３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１１９

Sunlight and Temperature

Sensors
COOL AIR WARM AIR
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
OFF (center) − The rear A/C unit SUNLIGHT SENSOR

shuts off.
The climate control system has two
Cool Air − Turn this dial sensors. A sunlight sensor is in the
counterclockwise to decrease the top of the dashboard, and a
temperature. temperature sensor is next to the
steering column. Do not cover the
Warm Air − Turn this dial clockwise sensors or spill any liquid on them.
to increase the temperature.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
114
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２８：３８３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１２０

Audio System
Some models may have one of the

AM/FM/CD Audio System
audio systems described in this (LX models)
section. On Canadian models
Read the appropriate pages in this
section for operation of the audio
systems installed in your models. AM/FM/CD Changer Audio System
See page 117 to 121 for playing the
Features
Radio.
Only U.S. LX-VP, EX-L, and EX-SE

models
See page 124 to 129 for playing the
XM Satellite Radio. (EX models) (LX-VP and EX-L models)
On U.S. models On U.S. models
See page 130 to 139 for playing a
Disc.
(EX-L models)
On Canadian models
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
115
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２８：４７３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１２１

Audio System
AM/FM/CD Changer Audio System

with rear entertainment system
(EX-L and EX-SE models) (EX and EX-L models)

On U.S. models On Canadian models
AM/FM/CD Changer Audio System with navigation system
(EX-L models) (EX-L models)

On U.S. models On Canadian models
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
116
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２８：５６３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１２２

Playing the Radio
(Canadian LX models) STEREO INDICATOR
AM/FM BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB AUTO SELECT BUTTON
Features
(U.S. LX-VP, EX, EX-L, and
Canadian EX-L models) SEEK/SKIP BAR PRESET BUTTONS TUNE/MODE KNOB
U.S. EX model is shown (U.S. EX-L, EX-SE, and Canadian EX, EX-L models
STEREO INDICATOR with rear entertainment system)
U.S. LX-VP and STEREO INDICATOR
EX-L models PWR/VOL KNOB AM/FM TUNE/SOUND
U.S. models
AM/FM TUNE KNOB BUTTON KNOB
BUTTON
U.S. EX and
Canadian Canadian
EX-L models models
AM BUTTON
AM BUTTON FM BUTTON
FM BUTTON PWR/VOL KNOB
SOUND KNOB SCAN BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON AUTO SELECT BUTTON SEEK BAR
SEEK BAR
AUTO SELECT BUTTON PRESET BUTTONS PRESET BUTTONS
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
117
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２９：０６３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１２３

Playing the Radio
To Play the Radio TUNE − Use the TUNE knob to If you do nothing, the system will
The ignition switch must be in the tune the radio to a desired frequency. then scan for the next strong station
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II) Turn the knob right to tune to a and play it for 10 seconds. When it
position. Turn the system on by higher frequency, or left to tune to a plays a station you want to listen to,
pushing the PWR/VOL knob or the lower frequency. press the SCAN button again.
AM/FM button. (AM or FM button
on U.S. EX model and Canadian SEEK − The SEEK function PRESET − Each preset button
model). searches up and down from the (1−6) can store one station on AM,
Adjust the volume by turning the current frequency to find a station and two stations on FM.
PWR/VOL knob. with a strong signal. To activate it,
The band and frequency that the press the /(−) or /(＋) 1. Select the desired band, AM or
radio was last tuned to is displayed. side of the bar, then release it. FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
To change bands, press the AM/FM twelve stations.
button (AM or FM button). On the SCAN − The scan function samples
FM band, ST will be displayed if the all stations with strong signals on the 2. Use the tune, seek, or scan
station is broadcasting in stereo. selected band. To activate it, press function to tune the radio to a
Stereo reproduction in AM is not the SCAN button, then release it. desired station.
available. You will see SCAN in the display.
The system will scan for a station 3. Pick a preset number (1−6), and
To Select a Station with a strong signal. When it finds hold it until you hear a beep.
You can use any of five methods to one, it will stop and play that station
find radio stations on the selected for about 10 seconds. 4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
band: tune, seek, scan, the preset total of six stations on AM and
buttons, and auto select. twelve stations on FM.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
118
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２９：１５３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１２４

Playing the Radio
AUTO SELECT − If you are To turn off auto select, press the Treble/Bass − Use the TRE/BAS
traveling far from home and can no A. SEL (auto select) button. This modes to adjust the tone to your
longer receive your preset stations, restores the presets you originally liking.
you can use the auto select feature to set.
find stations in the local area. Audio System Lighting
Adjusting the Sound You can use the instrument panel
Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A. SEL’’ Press the MODE or SOUND knob brightness control knob to adjust the
flashes in the display, and the system repeatedly to display the Bass (BAS), illumination of the audio system (see
Features
goes into scan mode for several Treble (TRE), Fader (FAD), and page 76 ). The audio system
seconds. It stores the frequencies of Balance (BAL) settings. illuminates when the parking lights
six AM and twelve FM stations in Each mode is shown in the display as are on, even if the system is turned
the preset buttons. it changes. Turn the TUNE/SOUND off.
knob to adjust the setting to your
You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after liking. When the level reaches the
pressing a preset button if auto center, you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display.
select cannot find a strong station for The system will automatically return
every preset button. the display to the selected audio
mode about 5 seconds after you stop
If you do not like the stations auto adjusting a mode.
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset Balance/Fader − These two
buttons as previously described. modes adjust the strength of the
sound coming from each speaker.
BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,
while FAD adjusts the front-to-back
strength.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
119
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２９：２３３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１２５

Playing the Radio
Voice Control System Operating the Radio on the While you are listening to the radio,
On vehicles with navigation system Navigation System Screen you can change to another band by
The audio system can also be pressing the AUDIO button next to
operated by voice control. See the the navigation system screen, and
Navi section in your quick start then touching the desired band icon
guide for an overview of this system, (FM1, FM2, or AM).
and the navigation system manual
for complete details. AUTO SELECT, SCAN, and SOUND
are adjustable from the navigation
screen. For an explanation of these
functions, see pages 118 and 119 .
AUTO SELECT − Touch the

A.SEL icon to activate the auto select
function. You will see A.SEL flashing
On vehicles with navigation system on the display.
In addition to the knobs, buttons, and
bars on the radio control panel, you SCAN − Touch the SCAN icon to
can operate some of the radio activate the scan function. You will
controls on the navigation system see SCAN on the display. Touch the
screen. icon again to deactivate it.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
120
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２９：３１３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１２６

Playing the Radio
Adjusting the Sound Left/Right Balance and Front/

Rear Fader − These modes adjust
AUDIO BUTTON the strength of the sound coming
from each speaker. Left/Right
balance adjusts the side-to-side
strength, while Front/Rear fader
adjusts the front-to-back strength.
To adjust the left/right balance,
Features
touch the ‘‘L’’ or ‘‘R’’ icon. To adjust
the front/rear fader, touch the ‘‘FR’’
or ‘‘RR’’ icon.
To see the audio display when you

are finished adjusting the sound,
To adjust the sound, push the Treble/Bass − To adjust the treble wait 5 seconds.
AUDIO button, then enter the sound and bass, touch ＋ or − on each side
grid by touching the SOUND icon on of the treble or bass adjustment bar. Audio System Lighting
the display. The adjustment bar shows you the You can use the instrument panel
current setting. brightness control dial to adjust the
illumination of the audio system (see
page 76 ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the radio is off.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
121
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２９：４０３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１２７

Radio Reception
Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

The radio can receive the complete How well the radio receives stations
AM and FM bands. is dependent on many factors, such
Those bands cover these frequen- as the distance from the station’s
cies: transmitter, nearby large objects,
and atmospheric conditions.
AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHz
FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz A radio station’s signal gets weaker
as you get farther away from its
Radio stations on the AM band are transmitter. If you are listening to an
assigned frequencies at least 10 kHz AM station, you will notice the sound
apart (530, 540, 550). Stations on the volume becoming weaker, and the
FM band are assigned frequencies at station drifting in and out. If you are
least 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3). listening to an FM station, you will Driving very near the transmitter of
see the stereo indicator flickering off a station that is broadcasting on a
Stations must use these exact and on as the signal weakens. frequency close to the frequency of
frequencies. It is fairly common for Eventually, the stereo indicator will the station you are listening to can
stations to round-off the frequency in go off and the sound will fade also affect your radio’s reception.
their advertising, so your radio could completely as you get out of range of You may temporarily hear both
display a frequency of 100.9 even the station’s signal. stations, or hear only the station you
though the announcer may identify are close to.
the station as ‘‘FM101.’’
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
122
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２９：４６３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１２８

Radio Reception
As required by the FCC:

approved by the party responsible for
authority to operate the equipment.
Features
Radio signals, especially on the FM Radio reception can be affected by
band, are deflected by large objects atmospheric conditions such as
such as buildings and hills. Your thunderstorms, high humidity, and
radio then receives both the direct even sunspots. You may be able to
signal from the station’s transmitter, receive a distant radio station one
and the deflected signal. This causes day and not receive it the next day
the sound to distort or flutter. This is because of a change in conditions.
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving. Electrical interference from passing
vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
123
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：２９：５２３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１２９

Playing the XM Satellite Radio
U.S. LX-VP and EX-L models U.S. EX-L and EX-SE models with rear entertainment system
PWR/VOL XM BUTTON DISP/MODE BUTTON PWR/VOL XM BUTTON DISP/MODE BUTTON

KNOB KNOB
TUNE KNOB TUNE KNOB
SCAN BUTTON PRESET BUTTONS CATEGORY BAR SCAN BUTTON PRESET BUTTONS CATEGORY BAR
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
124
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３０：０３３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１３０

U.S. LX-VP, EX-L, and EX-SE models system, and press the ‘‘XM’’ button.
only Adjust the volume by turning the
Your audio system is capable of PWR/VOL knob. The last channel
receiving XM Satellite Radio you listened to will show in the
anywhere in the United States, display.
except Hawaii and Alaska. You can also change to the XM radio
while you are listening to an FM
XM is a registered trademark of station, AM station, CD, etc., by
Features
XM Satellite Radio, Inc. touching the XM1 or XM2 icon on
XM radio receives signals from two the audio display (navigation system
satellites to produce clear, high- screen).
On vehicles with navigation system
quality digital reception. It offers
many channels in several categories. MODE − To switch between
Along with a large selection of channel mode and category mode, On the audio display, you will see the
different types of music, XM radio press and hold the DISP/MODE selected CHANNEL (number),
allows you to view channel and button until the mode changes. CATEGORY, NAME (artist name),
category selections in the display. In channel mode, you can select all and TITLE (music title).
The navigation system screen also of the available channels. In category
shows all XM information when the mode, such as Jazz, Rock, Classical, You may experience periods when
AUDIO button is pressed. etc., you can select all of the XM Radio does not transmit the
channels within that category. artist’s name and song title
Operating the XM Radio Each time you press and release the information. If this happens, there is
To listen to XM radio, turn the DISP/MODE button, the display nothing wrong with your system.
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY changes in the following sequence:
(I) or the ON (II) position. Push the Channel name, channel number,
PWR/VOL knob to turn on the audio category, artist name, and music title. CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
125
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３０：１３３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１３１

TUNE − Turn the TUNE knob left Preset − You can store up to 12 3. Pick a preset number (icon) you
or right to select channels. In the preset channels using the six preset want for that channel. Press and
category mode, you can only select buttons or preset icons on the audio hold the bar (icon) until you hear a
channels within that category. display. Each button stores one beep.
channel from the XM1 band and one
SEEK/SKIP (CATEGORY) − channel from the XM2 band. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the
Press either side of the CATEGORY first six channels.
bar ( − or ＋ ) to select another To store a channel:
category. 5. Press the XM button again or
1. Press the XM button. Either XM1 touch the other XM icon (XM1 or
SCAN − The scan function gives or XM2 will show in the display. XM2) on the audio display. Store
you a sampling of all channels while the next six channels using steps 2
in the channel mode. In the category 2. Use the TUNE knob, the and 3.
mode, only the channels within that CATEGORY bar, or the SCAN
category are scanned. To activate buttons to tune to a desired Once a channel is stored, press and
scan, press the SCAN/RPT button or channel. release the proper preset button
touch the SCAN icon on the audio (icon) to tune to it.
display. The system plays each In category mode, only channels
channel in numerical order for a few within that category can be selected.
seconds, then selects the next In channel mode, all channels can be
channel. When you hear a channel selected.
you want to continue listening to,
press the button or touch the icon
again.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
126
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３０：１９３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１３２

XM Radio Display Messages ‘‘NO SIGNAL’’ − The signal is

currently too
‘‘LOADING’’ − XM is loading the weak. Move the
audio or program vehicle to an area
information. away from tall
buildings, and
‘‘OFF AIR’’ − The channel with an
currently selected is unobstructed view
Features
no longer of the southern
broadcasting. horizon.
‘‘UPDATING’’ − The encryption ‘‘ - - - - ’’ − The selected channel

code is being number does not exist, or
updated. Wait is not part of your
until the subscription, or this
encryption code is channel has no artist or
fully updated. title information at this
Channels 0 and 1 time.
should still work
normally. ‘‘ANTENNA’’ − There is a problem
with the XM
antenna. Please
consult your dealer.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
127
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３０：２４３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１３３

The XM satellites are in orbit over

Signal may be blocked by Signal weaker in the equator; therefore, objects south
mountains or large obstacles to these areas. of the vehicle may cause satellite
the south. reception interruptions. To help
compensate for this, ground-based
repeaters are placed in major
metropolitan areas.
Satellite signals are more likely to be

blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you
travel from the equator. Carrying
large items on a roof rack can also
block the signal.
SATELLITE
GROUND REPEATER
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
128
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３０：３４３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１３４

Depending on where you drive, you As required by the FCC: knob until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.
may experience reception problems. Changes or modifications not expressly Your I.D. will appear in the display.
Interference can be caused by any of approved by the party responsible for
these conditions: compliance could void the user’s After you’ve registered with XM
authority to operate the equipment. Radio, keep your audio system in the
Driving on the north side of an satellite radio mode while you wait
east/west mountain road. Receiving Satellite Radio Service for activation. This should take about
Driving on the north side of a If your XM Radio service has expired 30 minutes.
Features
large commercial truck on an or you purchased your vehicle from While waiting for activation, make
east/west road. a previous owner, you can listen to a sure your vehicle remains in an open
Driving in tunnels. sampling of the broadcasts available area with good reception. Once your
Driving on a road beside a vertical on XM satellite radio. With the audio system is activated, you’ll be
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south ignition switch in the ACCESSORY able to listen to XM radio broadcasts.
of you. (I) or the ON (II) position, push the XM Radio will continue to send an
Driving on the lower level of a PWR/VOL knob to turn on the audio activation signal to your vehicle for
multi-tiered road. system and press the XM RADIO at least 12 hours from the activation
Driving on a single lane road button. A variety of music types and request. If the service has not been
alongside dense trees taller than styles will play. activated after 36 hours, contact XM
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you. Radio.
Large items carried on a roof rack. If you decide to purchase XM U.S. EX models
satellite radio service, contact XM Though it is not equipped with an
There may be other geographic Radio at www.xmradio.com, or at XM satellite radio system, your
situations that could affect XM radio 1-800-852-9696. You will need to give vehicle is ‘‘XM Ready.’’ If you
reception. them your radio I.D. number and purchase an XM radio receiver, you
your credit card number. To get your can connect it to your vehicle’s audio
radio I.D. number, turn the TUNE system to receive XM broadcasts.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
129
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３０：４２３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１３５

Playing a Disc
(Canadian LX models) CD BUTTON REPEAT INDICATOR

CD SLOT REPEAT BUTTON
CD EJECT
BUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB
(U.S. LX-VP, EX, EX-L, and SEEK/SKIP BAR RANDOM INDICATOR RANDOM BUTTON
Canadian EX-L models)
U.S. EX model is shown (U.S. EX-L, EX-SE, and Canadian EX, EX-L models
CD EJECT with rear entertainment system)
CD LOAD INDICATOR CD SLOT BUTTON
CD LOAD INDICATOR CD SLOT CD EJECT BUTTON
LOAD LOAD
BUTTON BUTTON
PWR/VOL PWR/VOL
KNOB CD KNOB CD
BUTTON BUTTON
REPEAT REPEAT
BUTTON BUTTON SKIP BAR
RANDOM SKIP BAR RANDOM
BUTTON PRESET BUTTONS BUTTON PRESET BUTTONS
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
130
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３０：５０３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１３６

Playing a Disc, Disc Changer
To Play a CD LX models On models with Satellite Radio

To load or play CDs, the ignition Insert a CD about halfway into the To listen to satellite radio when a CD
switch must be in the ACCESSORY CD slot. The drive will pull the CD in is playing, press the AUX/XM or XM
(I) or the ON(II) position. the rest of the way and begin to play button.
it. When the system reaches the end
You operate the CD player/CD of the disc, it will return to the If you turn the system off while a CD
changer with the same controls used beginning and play the disc again. is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
for the radio. To select the CD knob or by turning off the ignition,
Features
player/CD changer, press the CD You cannot load and play 3-inch the disc will stay in the drive. When
button. The number of the track (8-cm) discs in this system. you turn the system back on, the CD
playing is shown in the display. With will begin playing where it left off.
the in-dash CD changer, the disc and
track numbers are displayed. The
system will continuously play a CD Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
until you change modes. The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
To select a different disc, press the
appropriate preset button (1−6). On To play the radio when a CD is
models with navigation system, playing, press the AM/FM button
touch the appropriate disc icon. If (AM or FM button). Press the CD
you select an empty position in the button again to switch back to the
CD changer, the system will go into CD player.
the loading sequence.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
131
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３１：００３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１３７

Loading CDs in the In-dash CD 4. When ‘‘LOAD’’ appears again in SKIP − Each time you press and
Changer the display, insert the next CD into release /(＋), the player skips
Except for LX model the CD slot. forward to the beginning of the next
1. Press and hold the LOAD button track. Press and release /(−)
until you hear a beep and see Do not try to insert a disc until to skip backward to the beginning of
‘‘LOAD’’ in the display, then ‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You could the previous track.
release the button. damage the audio unit.
To load only one CD, press and To move rapidly within a track, press
release the LOAD button. 5. Repeat this until all six positions and hold the /(＋) or /
are loaded. The system will then (−). You will see CUE or REW in
2. On the upper left side of the begin playing the last CD loaded. the display.
display, the disc number for an
empty position will begin blinking, If you are not loading CDs into all six REPEAT − To continuously replay
and the green CD load indicator positions, press the LOAD button a track, press and release the RPT
will come on. again after the last CD has loaded. button. You will see RPT in the
The system will begin playing the display. Press it again to turn it off.
3. Insert the CD into the CD slot. last CD loaded.
Insert it only about halfway; the RANDOM − This feature plays the
drive will pull it in the rest of the If you stop loading CDs before all six tracks in random order. To activate
way. You will see ‘‘BUSY’’ in the positions are filled, the system will random play, press and release the
display. The CD loaded indicator wait for 10 seconds, then stop the RDM button. You will see RDM in
turns red and blinks as the CD is load operation and begin playing the the display. This continues until you
loaded. last CD loaded. press the RDM button again.
You cannot load and play 3-inch

(8-cm) discs in this system.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
132
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３１：０９３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１３８

Track Repeat Random Play within a Disc To Stop Playing a CD

On vehicles with navigation system On vehicles with navigation system On LX models
When you press and release the RPT When you press the RDM button or Press the eject button ( ) to
button or touch the TRACK touch the TRACK RANDOM icon on remove the CD. If you eject the CD,
REPEAT icon on the screen, the the screen, the system plays the but do not remove it from the slot,
system continuously replays the tracks of the current disc in random the system will automatically reload
current track. As a reminder, you order. You will see RDM (TRACK the CD after 10 seconds and put it in
will see RPT (TRACK REPEAT) in RANDOM) in the display. To turn pause mode. To begin playing, press
Features
the display. To turn this feature off, this feature off, press the RDM the CD button.
press the RPT button, or touch the button (touch TRACK RANDOM) Press the AM/FM button to switch
TRACK REPEAT icon again. again. to the radio while a CD is playing.
Press the CD button to play the CD.
Disc Repeat
On vehicles with navigation system If you turn the system off while a CD
When you press and hold the RPT is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
button until D-RPT (DISC REPEAT) knob or by turning off the ignition,
is in the display, or when you touch the CD will stay in the drive. When
the DISC REPEAT icon on the you turn the system back on, the CD
screen, the system continuously will begin playing where it left off.
replays the current disc. As a
reminder, you will see D-RPT in the
display.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
133
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３１：１７３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１３９

Removing CDs from the In-dash To remove a different CD from the Operating the Optional CD
CD Changer changer, first select it with the Changer
Except for LX model appropriate preset button. When that Optional on LX models
To remove the disc currently in play, CD begins playing, press the eject Load the desired CDs into the
press the eject ( ) button. When button. Continue pressing the eject magazine, and load the magazine
a disc is removed from a slot, the button to remove all the discs from into the changer according to the
system automatically begins the load the changer. instructions that came with the unit.
sequence so you can load another
CD in that position. If you do not You can also eject discs when the To select the CD changer, press the
remove the disc from the changer ignition switch is off. The disc that CD button. The CD and track
within 15 seconds, the system was last selected is ejected first. numbers will be displayed. To select
returns to the previous mode (AM/ a different CD, use the preset 5
FM or satellite radio). The disc will To eject one disc, press and release (DISC −) or preset 6 (DISC ＋)
reload into the system and will the eject button. button. If you select an empty slot in
remain there in a pause mode. the magazine, the changer will, after
To eject all discs, press and hold the finding that slot empty, try to load
eject button until the system beeps. the CD in the next slot.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
134
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３１：２６３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１４０

Protecting Your Discs
General Information Protecting Discs

When using CD-R discs, use only When a CD is not being played, store
high quality CDs labeled for audio it in its case to protect it from dust
use. and other contamination. To prevent
warpage, keep CDs out of direct
When recording a CD-R or sunlight and extreme heat.
CD-RW, the recording must be
closed for it to be used by the To clean a CD, use a clean soft cloth.
Features
system. Wipe across the CD from the center
to the outside edge.
Play only standard round CDs.
Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the A new CD may be rough on the
drive or cause other problems. inner and outer edges. The small
plastic pieces causing this roughness Handle a CD by its edges; never
Handle your CDs properly to can flake off and fall on the re- touch either surface. Do not place
prevent damage and skipping. See cording surface of the CD, causing stabilizer rings or labels on the CD.
this page. skipping or other problems. Remove These, along with contamination
these pieces by rubbing the inner from fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip
and outer edges with the side of a pens, can cause the CD to not play
pencil or pen. properly or possibly jam in the drive.
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the Never try to insert foreign objects in
disc to jam in the unit. the CD player or the CD changer.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
135
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３１：３６３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１４１

Additional Information of 1. Bubbled, wrinkled, labelled, and

Recommended Discs excessively thick discs
The in-dash disc player/changer has
a sophisticated and delicate
mechanism. If you insert a damaged
disc as indicated in this section, it
may become stuck inside and
damage the audio unit.
Examples of these discs are shown

to the right: Bubbled/ With Label/ Using Printer Sealed With Plastic
Wrinkled Sticker Label Kit Ring
2. Damaged discs 3. Poor quality discs
Chipped/ Warped Burrs

Cracked
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
136
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３１：４５３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１４２

4. Small, irregular shaped discs 5. Discs with scratches, dirty discs Recommended discs are printed
with the following logo.
Features
3-inch (8-cm) CD Triangle Shape
Fingerprints, scratches, etc.
CD-R or CD-RW may not play due

to the recording conditions.
Scratches and fingerprints on the

discs may cause the sound to skip.
Can Shape Arrow Shape
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
137
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３１：５７３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１４３

Disc Player Error Messages
The chart on the right explains the LX models

error messages you may see in the Error Message Cause Solution
display while playing a disc. Press the EJECT button and pull out the CD. Check if
FOCUS Error it is inserted correctly in the CD player.
If you see an error message in the Make sure the CD is not scratched or damaged. For
display while playing a disc, press more information, see page 136.
the eject button. After ejecting the Mechanical Error, Press the EJECT button and pull out the CD. Check
disc, check it for damage or or a DVD has the CD for damage or deformation. For more
deformation. If there is no damage, been loaded in the information, see page 136. If the CD cannot be pulled
insert the disc again. CD player out, or the error message does not disappear after the
CD is ejected, see your dealer.
The audio system will try to play the High Temperature Will disappear when the temperature returns to
disc. If there is still a problem, the normal.
error message will reappear. Press Except for LX models
the eject button, and pull out the disc. Error Message Cause Solution
Press the EJECT button and pull out the CD. Check if
Insert a different disc. If the new FOCUS Error it is inserted correctly in the CD player.
disc plays, there is a problem with Make sure the CD is not scratched or damaged. For
the first disc. If the error message more information, see page 136.
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it, Mechanical Error, Press the EJECT button and pull out the CD. Check
take your vehicle to a dealer. or a DVD has the CD for damage or deformation. For more
been loaded in the information, see page 136. If the CD cannot be pulled
CD player out, or the error message does not disappear after the
CD is ejected, see your dealer.
High Temperature Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
138
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３２：０５３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１４４

Disc Changer Error Messages
The chart on the right explains the Optional on LX models

error messages you may see in the
display while playing a disc. Error Message Cause Solution
If you see an error message in the Press the magazine EJECT button and pull it
display while playing a disc, press out. Check for an error message, and insert the
the eject button. After ejecting the FOCUS Error magazine again. If the message does not
disc, check it for damage or disappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,
Features
deformation. If there is no damage, see your dealer.
insert the disc again. No CD in the CD Insert a CD.
magazine
The audio system will try to play the Press the magazine EJECT button and pull it
disc. If there is still a problem, the out. Check for an error message and insert the
error message will reappear. Press Mechanical Error magazine again. If the message does not
the eject button, and pull out the disc. disappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,
see your dealer.
Insert a different disc. If the new High Temperature This message should disappear when the
disc plays, there is a problem with temperature returns to normal.
the first disc. If the error message No CD magazine in the Insert the CD magazine.
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it, CD changer.
take your vehicle to a dealer.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
139
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３２：１２３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１４５

Remote Audio Controls
Except for LX models If you are playing a CD, use the CH

CH BUTTON
Three controls for the audio system button to skip to the beginning of the
are mounted in the steering wheel next track. You will see the CD and
MODE
hub. These let you control basic BUTTON track number in the display.
functions without removing your
hand from the wheel.
The middle button adjusts the

volume. Press the top or bottom of
the button and hold it until the
desired volume is reached, then VOLUME
release it. BUTTON
The CH button has three functions, If you are listening to the radio, use the
depending on whether you are CH button to go to the next preset
listening to the radio, or playing a station. You will see the number of
CD. the preset button in the display. To
change bands, press the AM/FM
The MODE button changes the button.
audio mode between FM1, FM2, AM,
XM, CD, and DVD/AUX (if a disc is
inserted).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
140
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３２：１８３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１４６

Radio Theft Protection
Except for LX models If your vehicle’s battery is You will have to store your favorite
Your vehicle’s audio system may disconnected or goes dead, or the stations in the preset buttons after
disable itself if it is disconnected radio fuse is removed, the audio the system begins working. Your
from electrical power for any reason. system will disable itself. If this original settings were lost when the
To make it work again, you must happens, you will see ‘‘ENTER power was disconnected.
enter a specific five-digit code in the CODE’’ in the frequency display the
preset buttons. Because there are next time you turn on the system.
hundreds of number combinations Use the preset buttons (icons on
Features
possible from five-digits, making the vehicles with navigation system) to
system work without knowing the enter the code. The code is on the
exact code is nearly impossible. radio code card included in your
owner’s manual kit. When it is
You should have received a radio entered correctly, the radio will start
code card that lists your audio playing.
system’s code and serial numbers. It
is best to store this card in a safe If you make a mistake entering the
place at home. In addition, you code, do not start over; complete the
should write the audio system’s sequence, then enter the correct
serial number in this owner’s manual. code. You have ten tries to enter the
correct code. If you are unsuccessful
If you lose the card, you must obtain in ten attempts, you must then leave
the code number from a dealer. To the system on for 1 hour before
do this, you will need the system’s trying again.
serial number.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
141
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３２：２３３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１４７

Setting the Clock
LX models
CLOCK CLOCK BUTTON
H BUTTON RESET BUTTON

M BUTTON
LX-VP, EX, EX-L, and EX-SE models
(U.S. EX model shown) CLOCK
SET BUTTON
H BUTTON
M BUTTON
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
142
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３２：２９３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１４８

Setting the Clock
LX models You can quickly set the time to the Except for LX models
Press and hold the CLOCK (SCAN/ nearest hour. If the displayed time is The display shows the time when the
RPT) button. Change the hours by before the half hour, pressing and ignition is in the ACCESSORY (I) or
pressing the H (preset 4) button holding the clock button, then the ON (II) position.
until the numbers advance to the pressing the RESET (preset 6) Press and hold the SET (TUNE)
desired time. Change the minutes by button sets the clock back to the button until the numbers flash.
pressing the M (preset 5) button previous hour. If the displayed time Change the hours by pressing the
until the numbers advance to the is after the half hour, the clock sets H (−) button until the numbers
Features
desired time. When you are finished, forward to the beginning of the next advance to the desired time. Change
release the CLOCK button. hour. the minutes by pressing the M (＋)
button until the numbers advance to
For example: 1:06 will reset to 1:00 the desired time. When you are
1:52 will reset to 2:00 finished, press the SET button again.
On models with navigation system

Refer to the navigation system
manual for how to adjust the time.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
143
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３２：３４３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１４９

Rear Entertainment System
U.S. EX-L, EX-SE, and Canadian EX, EX-L models
REAR ICON
REAR CONTROL OFF ICON
REAR SPEAKER OFF ICON
REAR POWER DVD/AUX BUTTON

BUTTON
REPEAT BUTTON
RANDOM PLAY PAUSE SEEK/SKIP BAR

BUTTON BUTTON BUTTON
U.S. model is shown REAR CTRL KNOB
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
144
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３２：４２３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１５０

If equipped To Turn On the System Rear Speakers

Your vehicle is equipped with a rear Press the REAR PWR button. To When you turn on the system, the
entertainment system that includes a turn on the rear controls (ceiling rear speakers are automatically
DVD player for the enjoyment of the panel/remote control), press the RR turned off if the rear system selects
rear passengers. CTRL knob. The system’s icon a different entertainment source
shows in the upper display. Your than the front system. You will see
With this system, the rear passengers can then operate the rear the Rear Speakers Off icon in the
passengers can enjoy a different system with the control panel in the upper display. The sound for the rear
Features
entertainment source (AM/FM ceiling. The rear control panel can be system is sent to the wireless
radio, XM radio, CD changer, or used as a remote control when it is headphones.
DVD player) than the front seat detached from the ceiling unit. Press
occupants. The audio is broadcast the RR CTRL knob again to turn the If you want to turn the rear speakers
through the supplied wireless rear controls off. You will see the on again, press and hold the REAR
headphones. Rear Controls Off icon in the upper PWR button until the Rear Speakers
display. Off icon goes off.
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II) The rear system selects the source it NOTE: The rear speakers are
position to operate the rear was last set to. If that source has connected to the front system, so
entertainment system. been removed (the DVD has been they will always play the source that
ejected from the player, for example), the front system is set to.
you will see ‘‘DVD EJECT’’ in the
display. You should select another
source or insert a DVD.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
145
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３２：４９３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１５１

To Select Rear Entertainment Operating the DVD Player from REAR CONTROL PANEL
from the Front Control Panel the Front Control Panel
To operate the rear entertainment The DVD player in your rear
system from the front panel, turn the entertainment system can play DVD
RR CTRL knob clockwise. The video discs and CDs. It features
amber RR LED comes on to show Dolby＊ noise reduction.
that the control panel is enabled.
＊
Dolby noise reduction is manufactured under
To play the radio, the buttons for the license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing
front entertainment system have the Corporation. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol OPEN BUTTON
same functions. are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation. OVERHEAD SCREEN
If a CD is loaded in the main CD
player or CD changer, select CD/ Open the overhead screen by
CHG. If the CD is loaded in the pushing the OPEN button. The
lower player, select DVD/AUX. screen will swing down part-way.
Pivot the screen the rest of the way.
If you pivot the screen too far
forward, past the second detent, the
display will turn off. Pivot the screen
back to the second or first detent to
turn the display back on. To close
the screen, pivot it up until it latches.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
146
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３２：５７３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１５２

Turn the Rear CTRL knob clockwise.

The amber Rear LED comes on to
show that the control panel is now
enabled.
REAR CTRL KNOB

Insert a DVD into the DVD/CD
player below the front panel.
Features
Push the DVD in halfway, the drive
will pull it in the rest of the way.
PLAY − Press the PLAY button if

the DVD does not start playing
automatically.
PAUSE − Press the PAUSE button

to pause the DVD. Press the button
EJECT
BUTTON again or press PLAY to resume.
Pause works only with the DVD
PLAY BUTTON PAUSE SEEK/SKIP BAR player.
BUTTON
U.S. model is shown

CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
147
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３３：０３３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１５３

SEEK/SKIP − Press and hold the EJECT − Press the eject button to Using the Rear Control Panel
＋ button to move forward; you will remove the DVD from the drive. To turn on the rear entertainment
see ‘‘CUE’’ in the display. Press and system from the rear control panel,
hold the − button to move To Return to Front Audio press the PWR button. Use the AM/
backward; you will see ‘‘REV’’ in the Controls FM button, XM button (U.S. models),
display. Release the button when the To return front panel control to the CD button, DVD/AUX button (U.S.
system reaches the point you want. front audio system, turn the REAR models), or AUX button (Canadian
CTRL knob counterclockwise. models) to select the entertainment
Each time you press and release the source. The selected source will be
＋ button of the SEEK/SKIP, the shown in the display. Make sure the
system skips forward to the rear control operation has not been
beginning of the next track or disabled with the REAR CTRL knob
chapter. Press and release the − on the front panel.
button to skip backward to the
beginning of the current track or
chapter. Press it again to skip to the
beginning of the previous track or
chapter.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
148
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３３：１０３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１５４

To Play the Radio from the Rear

Control Panel AM/FM BUTTON PWR BUTTON DVD/AUX BUTTON
Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a
station from the preset buttons.
Press the ▲ button to tune the radio
to a higher frequency, or press the
▼ button to tune to a lower
frequency. Pressing the or
Features
button causes the system to
search up or down the band for a
station with a strong signal. You will
see SEEK in the display. U.S. model is shown XM BUTTON CD BUTTON
On U.S. models the channels within the category

To Play the XM Radio from the when the radio is in the category
Rear Control Panel mode.
Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a
station from the preset buttons.
Press the button to search up
the channels in the channel mode.
The system will search up the
channels within the category when
the radio is in the category mode.
Press the button to search
down the channels in the channel
mode. The system will search down CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
149
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３３：１６３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１５５

Press the or button to To Play a CD from the Rear To move rapidly within a track, press
select another category. Control Panel and hold the or button.
If CDs are loaded in the CD changer, The system will continue to move
Pressing and holding the DISP select them by pressing the CD through the track. Press the
button for more than 5 seconds will button. If a CD is loaded in the DVD button to move forward, or the
change the search mode between player, press the DVD/AUX button. button to move backward.
Channel Search and Category Press the button to skip to the Release the button when the system
Search. Each time you press and beginning of the next track. Press reaches the point you want.
release the DISP button, the display the button to return to the
above the rear control panel changes beginning of the current track. If CDs are loaded in the CD changer
in the following sequence: Channel and the overhead screen is not open,
Number, Category Name, Music pressing the ▲ or ▼ button changes
Name, Artist Name, Channel Name, the discs.
and back to Channel Number.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
150
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３３：２７３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１５６

To Play a DVD from the Rear REAR CONTROL PANEL

Control Panel
The video screen is for use by rear DISP BUTTON
seat passengers only. The driver and
front seat passenger should not try
to view the screen while driving.
Open the overhead screen by
Features
pushing the OPEN button. The OPEN
screen will swing down part-way. BUTTON ENT BUTTON
Pivot the screen the rest of the way. OVERHEAD SCREEN MENU/SCROLL BUTTON
If you pivot the screen too far U.S. model is shown
forward, past the second detent, the
display will turn off. Pivot the screen Press the button when you chapter. Press the button to
back to the second or first detent to want to pause the DVD. Press this move forward, or the button to
turn the display back on. To close button again to go back to PLAY. move backward. Release the button
the screen, pivot it up until it latches. when the system reaches the point
Press the button to skip to the you want.
beginning of the next chapter. Press To select the menu on the DVD,
the button to return to the press the MENU/SCROLL button
beginning of the current chapter. (U.S. models) or MENU button
(Canadian models). Use the ,
To move rapidly within a chapter, , , and buttons to
press and hold the or move to the desired menu selection,
button. The system will then press the ENT button to enter
continue to move through the your selection.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
151
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３３：３３３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１５７

DISP Button
When you press the DISP button When you press the DISP button To go back to play, press the DISP
while a DVD is playing, the title, again, the subtitle, audio, angle, button.
chapter, elapsed time, and personal sound characteristics, and personal
surround logo are displayed surround logo are displayed
(STATUS 1). (STATUS 2).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
152
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３３：４０３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１５８

MENU Button System Messages Play Mode
Features
When you press the MENU button When you press the SETUP button When you select ‘‘Play Mode’’ by
while a DVD is playing, the DVD’s while a DVD is playing, the DVD’s pressing the or button, the
main menu is displayed. To go back setup menu is displayed at the play mode setup menu is displayed
to play, press the RETURN button. bottom of the screen. You can then above the ‘‘Play Mode’’ icon.
change various settings of play mode,
personal surround, and display. To
go back to play without changing any
setting, press the RETURN or
SETUP button, or select ‘‘Close’’ by
pressing the or button,
then press the ENT button.
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
153
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３３：４８３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１５９

Top Menu Audio The selectable languages vary from

DVD to DVD, and this feature may
not be available on some DVDs.
Press the RETURN or ENT button

to go back to the play mode setup
menu.
When you select ‘‘TOP MENU’’ When you select ‘‘Audio’’ from the
using the ▼ or ▲ button, the DVD’s play mode setup menu by pressing
title menu is displayed. This menu is the ▼ or ▲ button, you will see a
also displayed when you press the submenu of the dubbed language.
MENU button while a DVD is not
playing. Select the desired language by
pressing the ▼ or ▲ button. The
To go back to play, press the return sound characteristics (Dolby Digital,
button. LPCM, MPEG Audio, dts) recorded
with the selected language are also
displayed next to the language.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
154
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３３：５８３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１６０

Subtitle Angle
Features
To turn the subtitle on and off, select If more than one subtitle language is On some DVDs, the scenes are
‘‘Subtitle’’ from the setup menu by available, you will see the language recorded by more than one camera,
pressing the ▼ or ▲ button. You will currently selected when you select giving different viewpoints of the
see submenu ‘‘OFF’’ or ‘‘ON.’’ Select ‘‘ON’’ in the previous step. same scene. To change the angle,
‘‘OFF’’ or ‘‘ON’’ by pressing the ▼ or Select the desired subtitle language select ‘‘Angle’’ from the setup menu.
▲ button. by pressing the ▼ or ▲ button. You will see a submenu if there are
Press the RETURN or ENT button different angles available.
to go back to the play mode setup Select the number on the submenu
menu. by pressing the ▼ or ▲ button.
Press the RETURN or ENT button
to go back to the play mode setup
menu. CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
155
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３４：０４３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１６１

Search
When you select ‘‘Search’’ from the To do a title search, select ‘‘Title’’ by To do a chapter search, select
play mode setup menu, you will see pressing the ▼ or ▲ button. Change ‘‘Chapter’’ by pressing the ▼ or ▲
the submenu shown above. In the the number on the right submenu by button. Change the number on the
left submenu, you can select pressing the ▼ or ▲ button, and right submenu by pressing the ▼ or
between ‘‘Title’’ and ‘‘Chapter.’’ The press the ENT button to begin the ▲ button, and press the ENT button
right submenu displays the current title search. If you press the to begin the chapter search. If you
title or chapter number and the total RETURN button, the display returns press the RETURN button, the
number of titles or chapters. to the play mode setup menu without display returns to the play mode
doing the search. setup menu without doing the search.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
156
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３４：１３３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１６２

NumInput
Features
A numerical command can be issued change from the left side to right Select and enter the second digit
to a DVD by inputting a two digit side or right to left. number the same way. The cursor
number, and a button number can be will automatically move to the ‘‘ENT’’
selected on the screen. Select the first digit number using icon when you press the ENT button.
the , , , or Press the ENT button to enter the
Select the ‘‘Num Input’’ from the play button, and enter it by pressing number command. To go back to the
mode setup menu. The screen will the ENT button. If you want to DVD screen, press the RETURN
change as shown above. If you select change the number, select ‘‘DEL,’’ button.
the ‘‘Move Key’’ using the , and press the ENT button, then
, , or button, and select and enter the new number.
press the ENT button, the Num
Input display on the screen will CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
157
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３４：２１３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１６３

Personal Surround Selecting one of the sound effects, Display

Cinema, Music, or Voice, from the
personal surround menu allows you
to change the sound in your
headphones to match the disc you
are playing.
Select ‘‘Cinema,’’ ‘‘Music,’’ or ‘‘Voice’’

by pressing the ▼ or ▲ button, and
enter your selection by pressing the
ENT button. The ‘‘PERSONAL
SURROUND’’ logo is displayed in
the upper right corner of the screen.
To adjust the display, select
When you select ‘‘PERSONAL If you select ‘‘Off,’’ the logo ‘‘Display’’ by pressing the or
SURROUND’’ by pressing the disappears, and there will be no button, and enter your
or button, the personal special sound effect. selection by pressing the ENT
surround setup menu is displayed button. The display changes as
above the ‘‘PERSONAL shown above.
SURROUND’’ icon. You can adjust these display
settings:
Back Light
Contrast
Brightness
Tint
Color
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
158
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３４：２８３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１６４

Features
Select the quality you want to adjust If you want to set the display to the The display changes as shown above.
by pressing the ▼ or ▲ button, and default setting, select ‘‘Reset’’ by
then pressing the ENT button. The pressing the ▼ or ▲ button, and, Select ‘‘Yes,’’ and press the ENT
adjustment bar is displayed next to then pressing the ENT button. button. You will see the message
the selected item. Adjust the setting ‘‘Default display settings applied’’ on
by pressing the or button. the display for 5 seconds.
When you are finished with your
adjustment, press the ENT button.
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
159
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３４：３３３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１６５

Screen Mode
You can set the screen mode to
these settings:
Normal Normal Wide

Wide
Zoom
Full
Zoom Full
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
160
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３４：３９３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１６６

The selected setting will be

highlighted in blue for one second,
and the screen returns to the play
mode in the selected setting.
Features
Select the ‘‘Aspect Ratio’’ by pressing The selectable setting menu is
the or button, then press displayed, and the current setting is
the ENT button. highlighted in blue.
Select the desired setting by

pressing the ▼ or ▲ button, then
press the ENT button.
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
161
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３４：４７３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１６７

INITIAL SETTINGS Menu INITIAL SETTINGS (Language) Menu Language
When you press the SETUP button When you select ‘‘Language’’ with To select the language used in the
on the rear control panel when a the or button, the menu DISC menus, select ‘‘Menu Lang’’ by
DVD is not playing, the ‘‘INITIAL shown above appears. pressing the ▼ or ▲ button. You will
SETTINGS’’ menu is displayed. see the submenu next to ‘‘Menu
To return to the stop or prestop Lang.’’
There are two selectable menus: screen, select ‘‘Close’’ using the
‘‘Language’’ and ‘‘Others.’’ or button, and then press
the ENT, or the SETUP button.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
162
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３４：５４３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１６８

Features
Select the desired language by If you want another language than If you select ‘‘No,’’ and press the
pressing the ▼ or ▲ button, and those listed, you need to enter the ENT button, the display returns to
then pressing the ENT button. code number of the desired language. the initial screen of the ‘‘Language’’
Select ‘‘other,’’ and press the ENT menu.
The selectable languages are, button. The display changes as
English, French, Spanish, German, shown in the next column.
Italian, Dutch, and Japanese.
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
163
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３５：０２３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１６９

Audio Language
If you select ‘‘Yes,’’ the display If you made a mistake entering a You can select the dubbed language
changes to the language code input number, select ‘‘DEL’’ on the display before playing DVDs.
mode. Select the first number using with the , , , or Select ‘‘Audio Lang’’ by pressing the
the , , , or button, and press the ENT ▼ or ▲ button. You will see the
button, and press the ENT button on the control panel. Then submenu next to ‘‘Audio Lang.’’
button to enter it. Repeat this until all select and enter the correct number
four numbers are entered. When the as described. The display returns to Follow the same instructions you
fourth number is entered, the cursor the initial ‘‘Language’’ menu screen. used to set the menu language.
automatically moves to ‘‘ENT’’ on the
display. Press the ENT button on the
control panel to enter the new
language code.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
164
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３５：１１３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１７０

Subtitle Language INITIAL SETTINGS (Others) Dynamic Range
Features
You can select the subtitle language When you select ‘‘Others’’ at the ‘‘Dynamic Range’’ reduces the
before playing DVDs. bottom of the ‘‘INITIAL SETTINGS’’ differences between the loud and
Select ‘‘Subtitle Lang’’ by pressing screen, the above menu appears on quiet sound levels throughout the
the ▼ or ▲ button. You will see the the screen. disc. When this is on, the louder
submenu next to the ‘‘Subtitle Lang.’’ sounds are lowered, and quieter
sounds are increased.
Follow the same instructions you
used to set the menu language.
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
165
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３５：１８３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１７１

Angle Mark
ANGLE MARK
When you select the ‘‘Dynamic When you switch to another angle Select ‘‘Angle Mark’’ by pressing the
Range’’ by pressing the ▼ or ▲ while playing a DVD, the angle mark ▼ or ▲ button. The above submenu
button, you will see the submenu is displayed in the upper right corner appears. If you want the angle mark
next to the ‘‘Dynamic Range’’ as of the screen. to be displayed, select ‘‘ON’’ with the
shown above. or button, and then press
You can set the system to display or the ENT button. The display returns
To turn ‘‘Dynamic Range’’ on or off, not display this angle mark. to the ‘‘Others’’ menu.
select ‘‘ON’’ or ‘‘OFF’’ by pressing
the or button, and then
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
166
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３５：２６３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１７２

Parental Control Level
Features
When you select and enter ‘‘Yes,’’
You can place an auditory restriction Select ‘‘Parental Level’’ by pressing the display changes as shown above.
by changing the parental control the ▼ or ▲ button. You will see the To change the level, you need to
level. The higher the level number, submenu shown above. If you select enter your four digit password.
the lower the restriction. ‘‘No,’’ and press the ENT button, the Select the number for the first digit
display returns to the ‘‘Others’’ menu. by pressing the , , , or
button, and enter it by pressing
the ENT button. Repeat this until all
four digits are filled. When you enter
the fourth number, the cursor
automatically moves to ‘‘ENT’’ on the
display. Press the ENT button on the
control panel. CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
167
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３５：３２３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１７３

Changing the Password
If the system does not recognize the If you enter the password correctly, The password was set to ‘‘1111’’
password you entered, you will see you can then change the parental when the vehicle left the factory.
the above display. Repeat the control level.
parental control level steps until you
enter the correct password. Once you correctly enter the
password, press the ▼ or ▲ button
to change the level, and then press
the ENT button to enter your
selection.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
168
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３５：３９３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１７４

Features
To change the password, select Select the first number by pressing If the system does not recognize the
‘‘Password.’’ You will see the above the , , , or password you entered, you will see
menu displayed. Select ‘‘Yes’’ by button, and enter it by pressing the above display. Repeat the
pressing the or button, the ENT button. Repeat this until all password setting steps until you
then press the ENT button. four numbers are entered. When you enter the correct password.
enter the fourth number, the cursor
If you select ‘‘No,’’ and press the automatically moves to ‘‘ENT’’ on the
ENT button, the display returns to display. Press the ENT button on the
the ‘‘Others’’ menu. control panel.
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
169
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３５：４４３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１７５

If you forget the password, select The display changes as shown above.
‘‘Password,’’ and press the ▲ button If you want to use the default
10 times. password (1111), select ‘‘Yes,’’ and
The message ‘‘Default password

setting applied’’ is displayed for
5 seconds.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
170
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３５：５１３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１７６

Remote Control Replacing the Remote Control An improperly disposed of battery

Batteries can hurt the environment.
RELEASE BUTTON Always confirm local regulations for
COVER battery disposal.
Features
The rear control panel can be
detached from the ceiling unit and If it takes several pushes on the
used as a remote control. To remove button to operate the rear
it from the ceiling unit, press the entertainment system, have your
release button. The control panel will dealer replace the batteries as soon
swing down partway. Pivot it down as possible.
further past the detent until it
detaches from the hinge. To reinstall Battery type: BR3032
it, reverse the procedure.
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
171
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３５：５９３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１７７

As required by the FCC: This device Playable DVDs Protecting DVDs

complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. The tips on how to handle and
Operation is subject to the following two protect DVDs are basically the same
conditions: (1) This device may not as those for compact discs. Refer to
cause harmful interference, and (2) this ‘‘Protecting Your CDs’’ on page 135 .
device must accept any interference
received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.

approved by the party responsible for
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry There are various types of DVDs
Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is available. Some of them are not
subject to the following two conditions: compatible with your system.
(1) this device may not cause The DVD player in your Rear
interference, and (2) this device must Entertainment System can play
accept any interference that may cause DVDs and CDs bearing the above
undesired operation of the device. marks on their packages or jackets.
Those packages or jackets should
also bear the designation of ‘‘1’’ or
‘‘ALL’’. DVD-ROMs cannot be played
in this system.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
172
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３６：０６３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１７８

DVD Player Error Messages

The chart on the right explains the Message Solution
error messages you may see in the
display while playing a disc. ERROR F0 Eject the disc and reinsert it.
ERROR F2
If you see an error message in the Invalid region code Use a disc with the regional designation of ‘‘1’’ or ‘‘All’’.
display while playing a disc, press Invalid disc The disc is not playable in this unit. Eject the disc, and insert a disc
the eject button. After ejecting the compatible with this system.
Features
disc, check it for damage or Parental control active. Reinsert the disc, and increase the parental control level (see
deformation. If there is no damage, Change level to view. pages 167 and 168 ).
insert the disc again.
The audio system will try to play the

disc. If there is still a problem, the
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new

disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
173
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３６：１３３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１７９

Wireless Headphones The audio for the rear entertainment Replacing Batteries
system is sent to the wireless
headphones that come with the
system. When using the headphones,
make sure you wear them correctly:
L (left) and R (right) are marked on
the sides of the frame. The antennas
are in the front of the earpieces. If
you wear the headphones backwards,
the antennas will be aimed away
from the system, affecting the sound
VOLUME quality and range.
DIAL TAB
To use the headphones, pivot the
Some state and local government earpieces outward. This turns them Each headphone uses one AAA
agencies prohibit the use of on. To adjust the volume, turn the battery. The battery is under the
headphones by the driver of a motor dial on the bottom of the right cover on the left earpiece. To
vehicle. Always obey applicable laws earpiece. When you remove the remove the cover, insert a coin in the
and regulations. headphones, the earpieces slot and twist it slightly to pry the
automatically pivot inward, and the cover away from the earpiece. Pull
headphones turn off. When not in the cover outward, and pivot it out of
use, store the headphones in the the way.
pocket of either front seat.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
174
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３６：２１３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１８０

Auxiliary Input Jacks
COVER HEADPHONE CONNECTORS
Features
VOLUME
DIALS
BATTERY AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS
Remove the battery. Install the new Auxiliary input jacks and headphone The system will accept auxiliary
battery in the earpiece as shown in connectors for the rear inputs from standard video games
the diagram next to the battery slot. entertainment system are on the and video equipment.
Slide the cover back into place on the back of the center console
earpiece, then press down on the compartment. V = Video jack
back edge to lock it in place. L = Left audio jack
R = Right audio jack
An improperly disposed of battery
can hurt the environment. There are three headphone
Always confirm local regulations for connectors for the third seat
battery disposal. passengers. Each connector has its
own volume control.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
175
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３６：２７３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１８１

Security System
On EX, EX-L and EX-SE models SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR The security system will not set if
The security system helps to protect the hood, the tailgate, or any door is
your vehicle and valuables from theft. not fully closed. If the system will not
The horn sounds and a combination set, check the Door and Tailgate
of headlights, parking lights, side Open Monitor on the instrument
marker lights, and taillights flash if panel (see page 66 ) to see if the
someone attempts to break into your doors and the tailgate are fully
vehicle. This alarm continues for 2 closed. Since it is not part of the
minutes, then the system resets. To monitor display, manually check the
reset an alarm system before the 2 hood.
minutes have elapsed, unlock the
driver’s front door with the key or Do not attempt to alter this system
the remote transmitter. or add other devices to it.
Once the security system is set,
The security system automatically opening any door, the tailgate, or the
sets 15 seconds after you lock the hood without using the key or the
doors, hood, and the tailgate. For the remote transmitter, will cause it to
system to activate, you must lock the alarm. It also alarms if the radio is
doors from the outside with the key, removed from the dashboard or the
lock tab, door lock switch, or remote wiring is cut.
transmitter. The security system
indicator next to the driver’s door
lock starts blinking immediately to
show you the system is setting itself.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
176
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３６：３６３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１８２

Cruise Control
Cruise control allows you to maintain Using the Cruise Control

a set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)
without keeping your foot on the CRUISE CONTROL MASTER BUTTON RES/ACCEL BUTTON
accelerator pedal. It should be used
for cruising on straight, open
highways. It is not recommended for
city driving, winding roads, slippery
roads, heavy rain, or bad weather.
Features
CANCEL
BUTTON
Improper use of the cruise SET/DECEL
control can lead to a crash. BUTTON
Use the cruise control only 1. Push in the cruise control master NOTE: The CRUISE button can be
when traveling on open button. The indicator on the left on, even when the system is not
highways in good weather. instrument panel will come on. in use.
2. Accelerate to the desired cruising Cruise control may not hold the set
speed above 25 mph (40 km/h). speed when you are going up and
3. Press and release the SET/ down hills. If your speed increases
DECEL button on the steering going down a hill, use the brakes to
wheel. The indicator on the slow down. This will cancel cruise
instrument panel comes on to control. To resume the set speed,
show the system is now activated. press the RES/ACCEL button. The
indicator on the instrument panel will
come back on.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
177
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３６：４９３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１８３

Cruise Control
Changing the Set Speed To slow down in very small Canceling Cruise Control
You can increase the set cruising amounts, tap the SET/DECEL You can cancel cruise control in any
speed in any of these ways: button. Each time you do this, of these ways:
your vehicle will slow down about
Press and hold the RES/ACCEL 1 mph (1.6 km/h). Tap the brake pedal.
button. When you reach the Push the CANCEL button on the
desired cruising speed, release the Tap the brake pedal lightly with steering wheel.
button. your foot. The CRUISE Push the cruise control master
CONTROL indicator on the button.
Push on the accelerator pedal. instrument panel will go out.
Accelerate to the desired cruising When the vehicle slows to the Resuming the Set Speed
speed, then press the SET/ desired speed, press the SET/ When you push the CANCEL button
DECEL button. DECEL button. or tap on the brake pedal, the system
will remember the previously set
To increase the speed in very Even with the cruise control turned cruising speed. To return to that
small amounts, tap the RES/ on, you can still use the accelerator speed, accelerate to above 25 mph
ACCEL button. Each time you do pedal to speed up for passing. After (40 km/h), and then press and
this, your vehicle will speed up completing the pass, take your foot release the RES/ACCEL button. The
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h). off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes
will return to the set cruising speed. on. The vehicle will accelerate to the
You can decrease the set cruising same cruising speed as before.
speed in any of these ways: Resting your foot on the brake pedal
causes cruise control to cancel. Pressing the cruise control master
Press and hold the SET/DECEL button turns the system off and
button. Release the button when erases the previous cruising speed.
you reach the desired speed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
178
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３６：５７３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１８４

Compass
Compass Function REAR VIEW MIRROR The compass can be affected by

If equipped driving near power lines or stations,
Your vehicle has a compass in the across bridges, through tunnels,
rear view mirror. The compass over railroad crossings, past large
indicates the vehicle direction with vehicles, or driving near large
illuminated letters; N (north), S COMPASS objects that cause magnetic
(south), W (west), and E (east). The BUTTON interference. It can also be affected
center blue icon in the compass is by accessories such as antennas and
Features
always on. It serves as a reference roof racks that are mounted by
point. magnets.
CENTER ICON The compass mirror has a light

sensor behind the right side of the
The direction and center position rear view mirror. Make sure the
icons come on when you turn the extended sun visor or an accessory is
ignition switch to the ON (II) not covering the sensor.
position. The system then begins to
check the vehicle direction and
illuminates the appropriate icon(s).
To turn the compass on or off, press

the compass button on the back of
the rear view mirror.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
179
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３７：０７３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１８５

Compass
Compass Calibration 2. Drive the vehicle slowly in circles 2. Press and hold the compass
The compass may need to be at less than 5 mph (8 km/h) until button for about 3 seconds. When
manually calibrated after exposure to the center icon turns blue. This all of the direction icons begin to
a strong magnetic field. If the icon also turns blue by continuing blink, release the button.
compass seems to continually show to drive the vehicle under normal
the wrong direction, do this. driving conditions. When you see 3. The blue direction icon(s) blink
an actual heading on the compass, and show the current zone.
NOTE: Do this procedure in an open calibration is completed.
area, away from buildings, power 4. If the zone is incorrect, press and
lines, and other vehicles. Compass Zone Selection release the compass button
In most areas, there is a variation repeatedly to get to the correct
1. With the blue center icon between magnetic north and true number.
displayed, press and hold the north. Zone selection is required so
compass button for about 6 the compass can compensate for this 5. The compass will return to the
seconds. When the center icon variation. To check and select the normal display about 4 seconds
turns red, release the button. zone, do this: after you stop adjusting a zone
number.
1. Find the zone for your area on the
zone map (see page 181 ). Each
zone number (1 through 15)
corresponds to a compass zone on
the table (see page 181 ).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
180
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３７：１１３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１８６

Compass
Zone Map Compass Display for Each Zone
Features
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
181
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３７：１７３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１８７

Rearview Camera and Monitor
On EX-L models with navigation system When in reverse, the touch screen Since the rearview camera display
and navigation system ‘‘hard’’ area is limited, you should always
buttons are locked out, except the back up slowly and carefully, and
‘‘ZOOM’’ button. Touching the ‘‘▼’’ look behind you for obstacles.
or ‘‘▲’’ button allows you to adjust
the brightness of the rearview
camera image.
The camera brightness cannot be

adjusted by voice control.
REAR VIEW CAMERA
Whenever you shift to reverse (R)

with the ignition switch in the ON
(II) position, the rear view is shown
on the navigation system screen.
For the best picture, always keep the

rearview camera clean, and do not
cover the camera lens. To avoid
scratching the lens when you clean it,
use a moist, soft cloth.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
182
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３７：２７３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１８８

Homelink® Universal Transceiver
If equipped any garage door opener that lacks Important Safety Precautions
The HomeLink Universal safety stop and reverse features. Refer to the safety information that
Transceiver built into your vehicle came with your garage door opener
can be programmed to operate up to Units manufactured between April 1, to test that the safety features are
three remote controlled devices 1982 and January 1, 1993 may be functioning properly. If you do not
around your home, such as garage equipped with safety stop and reverse have this information, contact the
doors, lighting, or home security features. If your unit does not have an manufacturer of the equipment.
systems. external entrapment protection
Features
system, an easy test to confirm the Before programming Home Link
General Safety Information function and performance of the safety to a garage door or gate opener,
Before programming your HomeLink stop and reverse feature is to lay a make sure that people and objects
to operate a garage door opener, 2x4 under the closing door. The door are out of the way of the device to
confirm that the opener has an should stop and reverse upon prevent potential injury or damage.
external entrapment protection contacting the piece of wood.
system, such as an "electronic eye," or When programming a garage door
other safety and reverse stop features. As an additional safety feature, garage opener, park just outside the
door openers manufactured after garage.
If your garage door was manufactured January 1, 1993 are required to have
before April 1, 1982, you may not be external entrapment protection
able to program HomeLink to operate systems, such as an electronic eye,
it. These units do not have safety which detect an object obstructing the
features that cause the motor to stop door.
and reverse it if an obstacle is detected
during closing, increasing the risk of
injury. Do not use HomeLink with
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
183
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３７：３８３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１８９

Homelink Universal Transceiver
®
Training HomeLink If the red indicator in HomeLink

Before you begin − If you just continues to flash slowly (does
received your vehicle and have not not flash rapidly), your remote
trained any of the buttons in transmitter may stop
HomeLink before, you should erase transmitting after a short time.
any previously learned codes before Go to step 3.
training the first button. To do this,
press and hold the two outside 3. Press and hold the remote
buttons on the HomeLink transmitter button and one of the
transceiver for about 20 seconds, HomeLink buttons at the same
until the red indicator flashes. time. While continuing to hold the
Release the buttons, then proceed to HomeLink button, press and
step 1. release the remote transmitter
2. Press and hold the remote button every 2 seconds.
If you are training the second or transmitter button and one of the
third buttons, go directly to step 1. HomeLink buttons at the same If the red indicator in HomeLink
time. begins to flash slowly at first,
1. Hold the end of the garage door then rapidly, release both
opener remote transmitter 1 to 3 If the red indicator in HomeLink buttons, and go to step 4.
inches from HomeLink. Make begins to flash slowly at first,
sure you are not blocking your then rapidly, release both If the red indicator in HomeLink
view of the red indicator in buttons, and go to step 4. continues to flash slowly (does
HomeLink. not begin to flash rapidly),
repeat steps 1 thru 3.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
184
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３７：４７３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１９０

Homelink® Universal Transceiver
4. Test the Homelink button by Training With a Rolling Code TRAINING BUTTON
pushing it for about 1 second. System
If the button works, For security purposes, newer garage
programming is complete. door opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’
If the button does not work go or variable code. Information from
to step 5. the remote control and the garage
door opener is needed before
5. Push and hold the HomeLink HomeLink can operate the garage
Features
button and watch the red indicator door opener.
on Homelink.
If the indicator stays on, press The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’
the Homelink button again; the procedure trains HomeLink to the
remotely controlled device proper garage door opener code.
should operate. The following procedure 3. Press the “learn” button on the
If the indicator flashes rapidly synchronizes HomeLink to the garage door opener unit until the
for 2 seconds then stays on, you garage door opener so it sends and indicator next to the button comes
have a rolling code transmitter: receives the correct codes. on. The indicator may blink, or
go to ‘‘Training with a Rolling come on and stay on. You then
Code System’’ (see page 185 ). 1. Make sure you have properly have approximately 30 seconds to
completed the ‘‘Training complete the following steps.
6. Repeat these steps to train the HomeLink’’ procedure.
other two HomeLink buttons to 4. Press and hold the button on
operate any other compatible 2. Find the ‘‘learn’’ button on your HomeLink for 3 to 4 seconds.
remotely controlled device around garage door opener unit. The 5. Press the HomeLink button again
your home (lighting, automatic location will vary, depending on for about 1 second. It should
gate, security system, etc.). the manufacturer. operate the garage door.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
185
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３７：５８３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１９１

Homelink Universal Transceiver
®
Erasing Codes If a standard transmitter was As required by the FCC:

To erase the codes stored in all three programmed, the indicator will This device complies with Part 15 of the
buttons, press and hold the two stay on for about 25 seconds. FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
outside buttons until the red following two conditions: (1) This device
indicator begins to flash, then 2. Once the HomeLink indicator may not cause harmful interference, and
release the buttons. begins to flash slowly, continue to (2) this device must accept any
hold the HomeLink button, and interference received, including
You should erase all three codes follow steps 2 thru 5 under interference that may cause undesired
before selling the vehicle. ‘‘Training HomeLink’’ (see page operation.
184 ).
Retraining a Button Changes or modifications not expressly
If you want to retrain a programmed Customer Assistance approved by the party responsible for
button for a new device, you do not If you have problems with training compliance could void the user’s
have to erase all button memory. the HomeLink Universal Transceiver, authority to operate the equipment.
You can replace the existing memory or would like information on home
code using this procedure: products that can be operated by This device complies with Industry
HomeLink, call (800) 355-3515. On Canada Standard RSS-210.
1. Press and hold the HomeLink the Internet, go to Operation is subject to the following two
button to be trained until the www.homelink.com. conditions: (1) this device may not cause
HomeLink indicator begins to interference, and (2) this device must
flash slowly. HomeLink is a registered accept any interference that may cause
If a rolling code transmitter was trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc. undesired operation of the device.
previously programmed, the
indicator will flash rapidly for 2
seconds, and then stay on for
about 23 seconds.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
186
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３８：０２３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１９２
Main Menu
Before Driving
Before you begin driving your Break-in Period .............................. 188

vehicle, you should know what Fuel Recommendation .................. 188
gasoline to use and how to check the Service Station Procedures .......... 189
levels of important fluids. You also Refueling..................................... 189
need to know how to properly store Opening and Closing the
luggage or packages. The Hood ........................................ 190
information in this section will help Oil Check .................................... 191
you. If you plan to add any Engine Coolant Check .............. 192
accessories to your vehicle, please Fuel Economy ................................ 193
read the information in this section Accessories and Modifications .... 196
Before Driving
first. Carrying Cargo .............................. 198
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
187
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３８：１４３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１９３

Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation
Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation Some gasoline today is blended with

Help assure your vehicle’s future Your vehicle is designed to operate oxygenates such as ethanol or
reliability and performance by paying on unleaded gasoline with a pump MTBE. Your vehicle is designed to
extra attention to how you drive octane number of 87 or higher. Use operate on oxygenated gasoline
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km). of a lower octane gasoline can cause containing up to 10 % ethanol by
During this period: a persistent, heavy metallic rapping volume and up to 15 % MTBE by
noise that can lead to engine damage. volume. Do not use gasoline
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid containing methanol.
acceleration. We recommend using quality
gasolines containing detergent If you notice any undesirable
Do not change the oil until the additives that help prevent fuel operating symptoms, try another
scheduled maintenance time. system and engine deposits. service station or switch to another
brand of gasoline.
Avoid hard braking for the first In addition, in order to maintain good
200 miles (300 km). performance, fuel economy, and Premium fuel is recommended when
emissions control, we strongly towing in certain conditions (see
Do not tow a trailer. recommend, in areas where it is page 228 ).
available, the use of gasoline that
You should also follow these does NOT contain manganese-based For further important fuel-related
recommendations with an fuel additives such as MMT. information, please refer to your
overhauled or exchanged engine, or Use of gasoline with these additives Quick Start Guide.
when the brakes are replaced. may adversely affect performance,
and cause the malfunction indicator
lamp on your instrument panel to
come on. If this happens, contact
your authorized dealer for service.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
188
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３８：２１３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１９４

Service Station Procedures
Refueling 4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel

nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
SLIT not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leave
some room for the fuel to expand
with temperature changes.
Pull If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off
even though the tank is not full,
there may be a problem with your
vehicle’s fuel vapor recovery
Before Driving
system. The system helps keep
fuel vapor from going into the
ATTACHMENT FUEL FILL CAP atmosphere. Try filling at another
pump. If this does not fix the
1. Park with the driver’s side closest 3. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly. problem, consult your dealer.
to the service station pump. You may hear a hissing sound as
pressure inside the tank escapes.
2. Open the fuel fill door by pulling The fuel fill cap is attached to the
on the handle to the left of the fuel filler with a tether. Put the
driver’s seat. attachment on the fuel fill cap into
the slit on the fuel fill door.
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
189
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３８：３０３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１９５

5. Screw the fuel fill cap back on Opening and Closing the Hood
until it clicks at least once. If you
do not properly tighten the cap, HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
the malfunction indicator lamp
may come on (see page 283 ). You
will also see a ‘‘CHECK FUEL
CAP’’ message on the information
display.
6. Push the fuel fill door closed until

it latches.
LATCH
Gasoline is highly flammable 1. Park the vehicle, and set the 2. Put your fingers under the front
and explosive. You can be parking brake. Pull the hood edge of the hood near the center.
burned or seriously injured release handle located under the Slide your hand to the left until
when handling fuel. lower left corner of the dashboard. you feel the hood latch handle.
The hood will pop up slightly. Push this handle up to release it.
Stop the engine, and keep Lift up the hood.
heat, sparks, and flame away.
Handle fuel only outdoors. If the hood latch handle moves
Wipe up spills immediately. stiffly, or if you can open the hood
without lifting the handle, the
mechanism should be cleaned and
lubricated.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
190
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３８：４１３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１９６

Oil Check
GRIP
UPPER MARK
Before Driving
LOWER MARK
SUPPORT ROD CLIP DIPSTICK
3. Holding the grip, pull the support Wait a few minutes after turning the 4. Remove the dipstick again, and
rod out of its clip. Insert the end engine off before you check the oil. check the level. It should be
into the designated hole in the between the upper and lower
hood. 1. Remove the dipstick (orange loop). marks.
To close the hood, lift it up slightly to 2. Wipe off the dipstick with a clean If it is near or below the lower mark,
remove the support rod from the cloth or paper towel. see Adding Engine Oil on page 245 .
hole. Put the support rod back into
its holding clip. Lower the hood to 3. Insert the dipstick all the way back
about a foot (30 cm) above the into its hole.
fender, then let it drop. Make sure it
is securely latched.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
191
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３８：４６３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１９７

Engine Coolant Check Refer to Owner’s Maintenance

Checks on page 242 for information
RESERVE TANK about checking other items on your
vehicle.
MAX
MIN
Look at the coolant level in the

radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
between the MAX and MIN lines. If
it is below the MIN line, see Adding
Engine Coolant on page 248 for
information on adding the proper
coolant.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
192
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３８：５６３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１９８

Fuel Economy
Actual Mileage and EPA Fuel

Economy Estimates Comparison.
Fuel economy is not a fixed number. City MPG Highway MPG
It varies based on driving conditions,
driving habits and vehicle condition.
Therefore, it is not possible for one
set of estimates to predict fuel
economy precisely for all drivers in
all environments. Combined Fuel Estimated
Economy Annual Fuel Cost
Before Driving
The EPA fuel economy estimates
shown in the example to the right (Sample U.S. EPA label shown)
are a useful tool for comparison
when buying a vehicle. EPA Highway MPG − Represents a Estimated Annual Fuel Cost −
estimates include: mixture of rural and interstate Provides an estimated annual fuel
driving, in a warmed-up vehicle, cost, based on 15,000 miles (20,000
City MPG − Represents urban typical of longer trips in free-flowing km) per year multiplied by the cost
driving in a vehicle in light traffic. A traffic. A range of miles per gallon per gallon (based on EPA fuel cost
range of miles per gallon achieved is achieved is also provided. data) divided by the combined fuel
also provided. economy.
Combined Fuel Economy −
Represents a combination of city and For more information on fuel
highway driving. The scale economy ratings and factors that
represents the range of combined affect fuel economy, visit www.
fuel economy for other vehicles in fueleconomy.gov (Canada: Visit www.
the class. vehicles.gc.ca)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
193
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３９：１１３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００１９９

Fuel Economy
Fuel Economy Factors Use the recommended viscosity Observe the speed limit −
The following factors can lower your motor oil, displaying the API Aerodynamic drag has a big effect
vehicle’s fuel economy: Certification Seal (see page on fuel mileage at speeds above 45
Aggressive driving (hard 245 ). mph (75 km/h). Reduce your
acceleration and braking) Maintain proper tire inflation speed and you reduce the drag.
Excessive idling, accelerating and − An under-inflated tire increases Trailers, car top carriers, roof
braking in stop-and-go traffic ‘‘rolling resistance,’’ which reduces racks and bike racks are also big
Cold engine operation (engines fuel economy. contributors to increased drag.
are more efficient when warmed Avoid carrying excess weight in Always drive in the highest gear
up) your vehicle − It puts a heavier possible − If your vehicle has a
Driving with a heavy load or the load on the engine, increasing fuel manual transmission, you can
air conditioner running consumption. boost your fuel economy by up
Improperly inflated tires Keep your vehicle clean − In shifting as early as possible.
particular, a build-up of snow or Avoid excessive idling − Idling
Improving Fuel Economy mud on your vehicle’s underside results in 0 miles per gallon.
adds weight and rolling resistance. Minimize the use of the air
Vehicle Maintenance Frequent cleaning helps your fuel conditioning system − The A/C
A properly maintained vehicle economy. puts an extra load on the engine
maximizes fuel economy. Poor which makes it use more fuel. Use
maintenance can significantly reduce Drive Efficiently the fresh-air ventilation when
fuel economy. Always maintain your Drive moderately − Rapid possible.
vehicle according to the maintenance acceleration, abrupt cornering, Plan and combine trips −
messages displayed on the and hard braking increase fuel Combine several short trips into
information display (see Owner’s consumption. one. A warmed-up engine is more
Maintenance Checks on page 242 ). fuel efficient than a cold one.
For example:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
194
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３９：１９３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２００

Fuel Economy
Calculating Fuel Economy Checking Your Fuel Economy
Measuring Techniques
Direct calculation is the
recommended source of information
about your actual fuel economy. Miles Gallons Miles per
Using frequency of fill-ups or taking driven of fuel Gallon
fuel gauge readings are NOT
accurate measures of fuel economy.
Fuel economy may improve over the
Before Driving
first several thousand miles. L per
100 Liter Kilometers 100 km
1) Fill the fuel tank until the nozzle automatically clicks off.
2) Reset trip counter to zero.
3) Record the total gallons (liters) needed to refill.
4) Follow one of the simple calculations above.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
195
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３９：２７３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２０１

Accessories and Modifications
Modifying your vehicle, or installing Before installing any accessory:

some non-Honda accessories, can
make it unsafe. Before you make any Improper accessories or Make sure the accessory does not
modifications or add any accessories, modifications can affect your obscure any lights, or interfere
be sure to read the following vehicle’s handling, stability, and with proper vehicle operation or
information. performance, and cause a performance.
crash in which you can be hurt
Accessories or killed. Be sure electronic accessories do
Your dealer has Honda accessories not overload electrical circuits
that allow you to personalize your Follow all instructions in this (see page 289 ) or interfere with
vehicle. These accessories have owner’s manual regarding proper operation of your vehicle.
been designed and approved for your accessories and modifications.
vehicle, and are covered by warranty. Before installing any electronic
accessory, have the installer
Although non-Honda accessories When properly installed, cellular contact your dealer for assistance.
may fit on your vehicle, they may not phones, alarms, two-way radios, and If possible, have your dealer
meet factory specifications, and low-powered audio systems should inspect the final installation.
could adversely affect your vehicle’s not interfere with your vehicle’s
handling and stability. computer controlled systems, such Do not install accessories on the
as your airbags, anti-lock brakes, and side pillars or across the rear
tire pressure monitoring system. windows. Accessories installed in
these areas may interfere with
proper operation of the side
curtain airbags.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
196
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３９：３５３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２０２

Accessories and Modifications
Modifying Your Vehicle Non-Honda wheels, because they

Removing parts from your vehicle, are a universal design, can cause
or replacing components with excessive stress on suspension
non-Honda components could components and will not be
seriously affect your vehicle’s compatible with the tire pressure
handling, stability, and reliability. monitoring system (TPMS).
Here are some examples: Larger or smaller wheels and tires

can interfere with the operation of
Lowering your vehicle with a your vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and
Before Driving
non-Honda suspension kit that other systems.
significantly reduces ground
clearance can allow the Modifying your steering wheel or
undercarriage to hit speed bumps any other part of your vehicle’s
or other raised objects, which safety features can make the
could cause the airbags to deploy. systems ineffective.
Raising your vehicle with a If you plan to modify your vehicle,

non-Honda suspension kit can consult your dealer.
affect the handling and stability.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
197
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３９：４２３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２０３

Carrying Cargo
Your vehicle has several convenient

storage areas:
GLOVE BOX DOOR POCKETS
REAR COMPARTMENT Glove box
Front door and seat-back pockets
Rear cargo area, including the

second and third row seats when
folded flat
Console compartment
Rear compartment
However, carrying too much cargo,

or improperly storing it, can affect
your vehicle’s handling, stability,
stopping distance, and tires, and
make it unsafe. Before carrying any
type of cargo, be sure to read the
SEAT-BACK POCKETS
following pages.
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT CARGO AREA
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
198
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：３９：５２３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２０４

Carrying Cargo
Load Limits Steps for Determining Correct Load

The maximum load for your vehicle Limit:
is 1,322 lbs (600 kg). Overloading or improper (1)Locate the statement ‘‘The
loading can affect handling and combined weight of occupants and
See Tire And Loading Information stability and cause a crash in cargo should never exceed XXX
label attached to the driver’s which you can be hurt or killed. kg or XXX lbs.’’ on your vehicle’s
doorjamb. placard.
Follow all load limits and other
Label Example loading guidelines in this (2)Determine the combined weight
manual. of the driver and passengers that
Before Driving
will be riding in your vehicle.
(3)Subtract the combined weight of

the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4)The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity.
For example, if the amount equals
850 lbs, and there will be five 150
lb. passengers in your vehicle, the
This figure includes the total weight amount of available cargo and
of all occupants, cargo, and luggage load capacity is 100 lbs.
accessories, and the tongue load if (850 − 750 (5 × 150) = 100 lbs.)
you are towing a trailer. CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
199
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４０：０５３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２０５

Carrying Cargo
(5)Determine the combined weight

of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available Example 1
cargo and luggage load capacity
Max Load (1,322 lbs) Passenger Weight Cargo Weight
calculated in Step 4. (150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs) (1,022 lbs)
(6)If your vehicle will be towing a

trailer, the load from your trailer
will be transferred to your vehicle. Example 2
Consult this manual to determine
Max Load (1,322 lbs) Passenger Weight Cargo Weight
how this reduces the available (150 lbs x 4 = 600 lbs) (722 lbs)
cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
In addition, the total weight of the Example 3

vehicle, all occupants, accessories,
cargo, and trailer tongue load must Max Load (1,322 lbs) Passenger Weight Cargo Weight
(150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs) (572 lbs)
not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both
are on a label on the driver’s
doorjamb.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
200
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４０：１３３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２０６

Carrying Cargo
Carrying Cargo in the Passenger Carrying Cargo in the Cargo Area If you carry large items that
Compartment or on a Roof Rack prevent you from closing the
Store or secure all items that could Distribute cargo evenly on the tailgate, exhaust gas can enter the
be thrown around and hurt floor of the cargo area, placing the passenger area. To avoid the
someone during a crash. heaviest items on the bottom and possibility of carbon monoxide
as far forward as possible. Tie poisoning, follow the instructions
Be sure items placed on the floor down items that could be thrown on page 57 .
behind the front seats cannot roll about the vehicle during a crash or
underneath and interfere with the sudden stop. If you carry any items on a roof
proper operation of the seats, the rack, be sure the total weight of
Before Driving
sensors under the seats, or the If you fold down the second or the rack and the items does not
driver’s ability to operate the third row seats, tie down items exceed 165 lbs (75 kg).
pedals. that could be thrown about the
vehicle during a crash or sudden If you use an accessory roof rack,
Keep the glove box closed while stop. the roof rack weight limit may be
driving. If it is open, a passenger lower. Refer to the information that
could injure their knees during a came with your roof rack.
crash or sudden stop.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
201
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４０：２１３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２０７

Carrying Cargo
Optional Separation Net Cargo Hooks Cargo Net

The separation net can be used to If equipped
hold back soft, lightweight items
stored in the cargo area. Heavy
items should be properly secured on
the floor of the cargo area. The net
may not prevent heavy items from
being thrown forward in a crash or a
sudden stop.
Optional Cargo Cover

The cargo cover can be used to
cover the cargo area behind the third HOOK
row seats. When the third row seats
are folded down, the cargo cover can Your vehicle also has a grocery hook
be extended over the larger area. Do on each side panel in the cargo area. You can use the cargo net to secure
not install the cover over the larger They are designed to hold light items in the cargo area, and store
area if the third row seats are not items. Heavy objects may damage small items between the two halves
folded down. the hook. Make sure any items put of the net. To install the cargo net,
on each hook weigh less than 6.5 lbs hook the loops on the four corners of
(3 kg). the net to the tabs at both sides of
the tailgate sill.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
202
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４０：２５３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２０８
Main Menu
Driving
This section gives you tips on Driving Guidelines ......................... 204

starting the engine under various Starting the Engine........................ 205
conditions, and how to operate the Automatic Transmission............... 206
automatic transmission. It also VTM-4 System ............................... 210
includes important information on Tire Pressure Monitoring
parking your vehicle, the braking System (TPMS) ......................... 211
system, the VTM-4 system (4WD Parking ............................................ 214
models only), the vehicle stability Braking System.............................. 215
assist (VSA) system, the tire Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) ................ 216
pressure monitoring system (TPMS), Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)
and facts you need if you are System..................................... 218
planning to tow a trailer or drive off- VSA Off Switch .......................... 219
Driving
highway. Towing a Trailer ............................ 220
Off-Highway Driving
Guidelines ................................... 230
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
203
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４０：３８３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２０９

Driving Guidelines
Your vehicle has a higher ground Do not modify your vehicle in any Preparing to Drive
clearance that allows you to travel way that would raise the center of You should do the following checks
over bumps, obstacles, and rough gravity. and adjustments before you drive
terrain. It also provides good your vehicle.
visibility so you can anticipate Do not carry heavy cargo on the
problems earlier. roof. 1. Make sure all windows, mirrors,
and outside lights are clean and
Because your vehicle rides higher Four-wheel drive models unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
off the ground, it has a high center Your vehicle is equipped with a four- or ice.
of gravity that can cause it to roll wheel drive (4WD) system. When
over if you make abrupt turns. Utility the system senses a loss of front- 2. Check that the hood is fully closed.
vehicles have a significantly higher wheel traction, it automatically
roll over rate than other types of transfers some power to the rear 3. Visually check the tires. If a tire
vehicles. wheels. This gives you better looks low, use a gauge to check its
traction and mobility. pressure (see page 264 ).
To prevent rollovers or loss of
control: You still need to exercise the same 4. Check that any items you may be
care when accelerating, steering, and carrying are stored properly or
Take corners at slower speeds braking that you would in a two- fastened down securely.
than you would with a passenger wheel drive vehicle.
vehicle. 5. Check the seat adjustment (see
See page 230 for additional driving off- page 87 ).
Avoid sharp turns and abrupt highway guidelines.
maneuvers whenever possible.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
204
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４０：４９３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２１０

Driving Guidelines, Starting the Engine
6. Check the adjustment of the Starting the Engine 5. If the engine does not start within
inside and outside mirrors (see 1. Apply the parking brake. 15 seconds, or starts but stalls
page 92 ). right away, repeat step 4 with the
2. In cold weather, turn off all accelerator pedal pressed halfway
7. Check the steering wheel electrical accessories to reduce down. If the engine starts, release
adjustment (see page 78 ). the drain on the battery. pressure on the accelerator pedal
so the engine does not race.
8. Make sure the doors and the 3. Make sure the shift lever is in
tailgate are securely closed and Park. Press on the brake pedal. 6. If the engine fails to start, press
locked. the accelerator pedal all the way
4. Without touching the accelerator down, and hold it there while
9. Fasten your seat belt. Check that pedal, turn the ignition key to the starting to clear flooding. If the
Driving
your passengers have fastened START (III) position. Do not hold engine still does not start, return
their seat belts (see page 15 ). the key in the START (III) to step 5.
position for more than 15 seconds
10.When you start the engine, check at a time. If the engine does not
the gauges and indicators in the start right away, pause for at least
instrument panel (see page 61 ). 10 seconds before trying again. The engine is harder to start in cold
weather. Also, the thinner air f ound at
altitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400
meters) adds to this problem.
The immobilizer system protects your
vehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly-
coded key (or other device) is used, the
engine’s f uel system is disabled. For
more inf ormation, see page 80 .
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
205
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４０：５６３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２１１

Automatic Transmission
Shift Lever Position Indicators If the malfunction indicator lamp Shifting

comes on along with the ‘‘D’’
indicator, there is a problem with the
automatic transmission control
system. Avoid rapid acceleration, and
have the transmission checked by
your dealer as soon as possible.
SHIFT LEVER
These indicators on the instrument To shift from Park to any position,

panel show which position the shift press firmly on the brake pedal, and
lever is in. pull the shift lever toward you. You
cannot shift out of Park when the
The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a ignition switch is in the LOCK (0) or
few seconds when you turn the ACCESSORY (I) position.
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it flashes while driving (in
any shift position), it indicates a
possible problem in the transmission.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
206
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４１：０４３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２１２

To shift from: Do this: Park (P) − This position mechani- Neutral (N) − Use neutral if you
Press the brake pedal and cally locks the transmission. Use need to restart a stalled engine, or if
P to R pull the shift lever towards Park whenever you are turning off or it is necessary to stop briefly with
you. starting the engine. To shift out of the engine idling. Shift to the Park
R to P Park, you must press on the brake position if you need to leave your
N to R Pull the shift lever towards pedal and have your foot off the vehicle for any reason. Press on the
D3 to 2 you. accelerator pedal. Pull the shift lever brake pedal when you are moving
2 to 1 towards you, then move it out of the shift lever from neutral to
1 to 2 Park. another gear.
2 to D3
D3 to D If you have done all of the above and Drive (D) − Use this position for
D to N Move the shift lever. still cannot move the lever out of your normal driving. The
Driving
D to D3 Park, see Shift Lock Release on transmission automatically selects a
N to D page 209 . suitable gear for the vehicle speed
R to N and acceleration. You may notice the
To avoid transmission damage, come transmission shifting up at higher
to a complete stop before shifting speeds when the engine is cold. This
into Park. The shift lever must be in helps the engine warm up faster.
Park before you can remove the key
from the ignition switch.
Reverse (R) − Press the brake

pedal and pull the shift lever towards
you to shift from Park to reverse. To
shift from reverse to neutral, come
to a complete stop and then shift. CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
207
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４１：１２３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２１３

Drive (D3) −This position is similar Second (2) − This position locks First (1) − This position locks the
to D, except only the first three the transmission in second gear. It transmission in first gear. By
gears are selected. Use D3 to provide does not downshift to first gear upshifting and downshifting through
engine braking when going down a when you come to a stop. 1, 2, D3, and D, you can operate the
steep hill. D3 can also keep the transmission much like a manual
transmission from cycling between Use second gear: transmission without a clutch pedal.
third and fourth gears in stop-and-go
driving. For more power when climbing. Engine Speed Limiter
If you exceed the maximum speed
To increase engine braking when for the gear you are in, the engine
going down steep hills. speed will enter into the tachometer’s
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
For starting out on a slippery the engine cut in and out. This is
surface or in deep snow. caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
To help reduce wheel spin. run normally when you reduce the
rpm below the red zone.
When driving downhill with a
trailer.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
208
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４１：２１３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２１４

Shift Lock Release 3. Put a cloth on the edge of the shift 5. Push down on the key while you
Do this if pushing on the brake pedal lock release slot cover. Using a pull the shift lever towards you,
and pulling the shift lever does not small flat-tipped screwdriver or a and move it out of Park to neutral.
shift the transmission out of Park: metal fingernail file, carefully pry
on the edge of the cover to remove 6. Remove the key from the shift
1. Set the parking brake. it. lock release slot, then install the
cover. Press the brake pedal, and
2. Remove the key from the ignition restart the engine.
switch.
If you need to use the shift lock
release, it means your vehicle is
developing a problem. Have the
Driving
vehicle checked by your dealer.
4. Insert the key in the shift lock

release slot.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
209
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４１：３２３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２１５

VTM-4 System
The variable torque management To Engage the VTM-4 Lock To Disengage the VTM-4 Lock, do
4WD (VTM-4) system automatically 1. The vehicle must be stopped with any of the following:
transfers varying amounts of engine the engine running. Press the VTM-4 LOCK button.
torque to the rear wheels under 2. Move the shift lever to first (1),
lower traction conditions. second (2), or reverse (R) gear. Move the shift lever to D or D3.
3. Press the VTM-4 LOCK button.
If more traction is needed when your The indicator in the button comes Turn the ignition switch to the
vehicle is stuck, or is likely to on. LOCK (0) position.
become stuck, you can use the
VTM-4 LOCK button to increase To get unstuck, apply light pressure The VTM-4 Lock will temporarily
torque to the rear wheels. to the accelerator pedal. Do not spin disengage when the vehicle speed
the front tires for more than a few exceeds 18 mph (30 km/h). The
seconds. Because of the amount of indicator in the button will remain on.
torque applied to the rear tires, they
should not spin. This is normal. If
you are not able to move the vehicle,
stop and reverse direction. Do not continuously spin the f ront tires
of your vehicle. Continuously spinning
the f ront tires can cause transmission
or rear dif f erential damage.
Do not use the VTM-4 LOCK button on
dry, paved roads. Driving on dry,
paved roads with VTM-4 Lock ON may
damage the rear dif f erential when
making a turn. Strange noise and
vibration can also result.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
210
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４１：４０３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２１６

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire Low Tire Pressure Driving on a significantly under-
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) Indicator inflated tire causes the tire to
that turns on every time you start the When the low tire pressure indicator overheat and can lead to tire failure.
engine and monitors the pressure in is on, one or more of your tires is Under-inflation also reduces fuel
your tires while driving. significantly underinflated. You efficiency and tire tread life, and may
should stop and check your tires as affect the vehicle’s handling and
Each tire has its own pressure soon as possible, and inflate them to stopping ability.
sensor (not including the spare tire). the proper pressure as indicated on
If the air pressure of a tire becomes the vehicle’s tire information placard. Because tire pressure varies by
significantly low, the sensor in that temperature and other conditions,
tire immediately sends a signal that If you think you can safely drive a the low tire pressure indicator may
causes the low tire pressure short distance to a service station, come on unexpectedly.
Driving
indicator and the appropriate tire on proceed slowly, and inflate the tire to
the tire pressure monitor to come on. the recommended pressure shown
on the driver’s doorjamb.
If the tire is flat, or if the tire

pressure is too low to continue
driving, replace the tire with the
compact spare tire (see page 272 ).
If you cannot make the low tire

pressure indicator go out after
inflating the tires to the specified
values, have your dealer check the
system as soon as possible. CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
211
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／１０１７：３８：５５３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２１７

For example, if you check and fill placard and this owner’s manual (see When you restart the vehicle with
your tires in a warm area, then drive page 295 ). the compact spare tire, the TPMS
in extremely cold weather, the tire indicator may also come on and stay
pressure will be lower than Tire Pressure Monitor on after driving several miles
measured and could be underinflated (kilometers).
and cause the low tire pressure The appropriate tire indicator and
indicator to come on. Or, if you low tire pressure indicator comes on
check and adjust your tire pressure if a tire becomes significantly
in cooler conditions, and drive into underinflated. See Low Tire
extremely hot conditions, the tire Pressure Indicator on page 211 .
may become overinflated. However,
the low tire pressure indicator will Tire Pressure Monitoring
not come on if the tires are System (TPMS) Indicator
overinflated. This indicator comes on and stays on
if there is a problem with the tire
Refer to page 263 for tire inflation pressure monitoring system.
guidelines.
If this happens, the system will shut
Although your tire pressure is off and no longer monitor tire
monitored, you must manually check pressures. Have the system checked
the tire pressures monthly. by your dealer as soon as possible.
Each tire, including the spare, should

be checked monthly when cold and
set to the recommended inflation
pressure as specified in the vehicle
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
212
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／１０１７：３９：０４３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２１８

Changing a Tire with TPMS After the flat tire is replaced with the As required by the FCC:
If you have a flat tire, the low tire spare tire, the low tire pressure This device complies with Part 15 of the
pressure and tire monitor indicators indicator stays on while driving. FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
will come on. Replace the indicated After several miles (kilometers) following two conditions: (1) This device
flat tire with the compact spare tire driving, the TPMS indicator comes may not cause harmful interference, and
(see page 272 ). on and the low tire pressure (2) this device must accept any
indicator goes off. This is normal; interference received, including
Each wheel is equipped with a tire the system cannot monitor the spare interference that may cause undesired
pressure sensor mounted inside the tire pressure. Manually check the operation.
tire behind the valve stem. You must spare tire pressure to be sure it is
use TPMS specific wheels. It is correct. Changes or modifications not expressly
recommended that you always have approved by the party responsible for
Driving
your tires serviced by your dealer or The low tire pressure indicator or compliance could void the user’s
a qualified technician. the TPMS indicator will go off, after authority to operate the equipment.
several miles (kilometers) driving,
when the spare tire is replaced with This device complies with Industry
the specified regular tire equipped Canada Standard RSS-210.
with the tire pressure monitor sensor. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
Never use a puncture-repairing agent interference, and (2) this device must
in a flat tire. If used, you will have to accept any interference that may cause
replace the tire pressure sensor. undesired operation of the device.
Have the flat tire repaired by your
dealer as soon as possible.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
213
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４２：０６３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２１９

Parking
Always use the parking brake when Parking Tips If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn
you park your vehicle. Make sure Make sure the moonroof (if the front wheels away from the
the parking brake is set firmly, or equipped) and the windows are curb.
your vehicle may roll if it is parked closed.
on an incline. If the vehicle is facing downhill,
Turn off the lights. turn the front wheels toward the
Set the parking brake before you put curb.
the transmission in Park. This keeps Place any packages, valuables, etc.
the vehicle from moving and putting in the cargo area or take them Make sure the parking brake is
pressure on the parking mechanism with you. fully released before driving away.
in the transmission. Driving with the parking brake
Lock the doors and the tailgate. partially set can overheat or
damage the rear brakes.
On vehicles with security system
Check the indicator on the driver’s
door to verify that the security
system is set.
Never park over dry leaves, tall

grass, or other flammable
materials. The hot three way
catalytic converter could cause
these materials to catch on fire.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
214
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４２：１３３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２２０

Braking System
Your vehicle is equipped with disc Constant application of the brakes Braking System Design
brakes at all four wheels. A power when going down a long hill builds The hydraulic system that operates
assist helps reduce the effort needed up heat and reduces their effective- the brakes has two separate circuits.
on the brake pedal. The anti-lock ness. Use the engine to assist the Each circuit works diagonally across
brake system (ABS) helps you retain brakes by taking your foot off the the vehicle (the left-front brake is
steering control when braking very accelerator and downshifting to a connected with the right-rear brake,
hard. lower gear. etc.). If one circuit should develop a
problem, you will still have braking
Resting your foot on the pedal keeps Check the brakes after driving at two wheels.
the brakes applied lightly, builds up through deep water. Apply the
heat, and reduces their effectiveness brakes moderately to see if they feel Brake Pad Wear Indicators
and reduces brake pad life. In normal. If not, apply them gently and All four brakes have audible brake
Driving
addition, fuel economy can be frequently until they do. Be extra wear indicators.
reduced. It also keeps your brake cautious in your driving.
lights on all the time, confusing If the brake pads need replacing, you
drivers behind you. will hear a distinctive, metallic
screeching sound when you apply
the brake pedal. If you do not have
the brake pads replaced, they will
screech all the time. It is normal for
the brakes to occasionally squeal or
squeak when you apply them.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
215
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４２：１７３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２２１

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
The anti-lock brake system (ABS) You should never pump the brake pedal. You will feel a pulsation in the brake
helps prevent the wheels from Let the ABS work for you by always pedal when the ABS activates, and
locking up, and helps you retain keeping firm, steady pressure on the you may hear some noise. This is
steering control by pumping the brake pedal. This is sometimes normal: it is the ABS rapidly
brakes rapidly, much faster than a referred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’ pumping the brakes. On dry
person can do it. pavement, you will need to press on
the brake pedal very hard before the
The electronic brake distribution ABS activates. However, you may
(EBD) system, which is part of the feel the ABS activate immediately if
ABS, also balances the front-to-rear you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
braking distribution according to
vehicle loading.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
216
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４２：２５３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２２２

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
ABS Indicator Important Safety Reminders A vehicle with ABS may require a
ABS does not reduce the time or longer distance to stop on loose or
If this indicator comes on, the anti- distance it takes to stop the uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
lock function of the braking system vehicle. It only helps with steering snow, than a vehicle without anti-
has shut down. The brakes still work control during braking. lock.
like a conventional system, but
without anti-lock. You should have ABS will not prevent a skid that
your dealer inspect your vehicle as results from changing direction
soon as possible. abruptly, such as trying to take a
corner too fast or making a sudden
If the ABS indicator and the brake lane change. Always drive at a safe
system indicator come on together, speed for the road and weather
Driving
and the parking brake is fully conditions.
released, the EBD system may also
be shut down. ABS cannot prevent a loss of
stability. Always steer moderately
Test your brakes as instructed on when you are braking hard. Severe
page 284 . If the brakes feel normal, or sharp steering wheel movement
drive slowly and have your vehicle can still cause your vehicle to veer
repaired by your dealer as soon as into oncoming traffic or off the road.
possible. Avoid sudden hard braking
which could cause the rear wheels to
lock up and possibly lead to a loss of
control.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
217
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４２：３３３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２２３

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
The vehicle stability assist (VSA) VSA Activation Indicator If the indicator does not come on
system helps to stabilize the vehicle when the ignition switch is turned to
during cornering if the vehicle turns When VSA activates, you will see the the ON (II) position, there may be a
more or less than desired. It also VSA activation indicator blink. There problem with the VSA system. Have
assists you in maintaining traction may also be some noise from the your dealer inspect your vehicle as
while accelerating on loose or VSA hydraulic system. soon as possible (see page 64 ).
slippery road surfaces. It does this
by regulating the engine’s output, VSA System Indicator Without VSA, your vehicle will have
and by selectively applying the normal braking and cornering ability,
brakes. If the VSA system indicator comes but it will not have VSA traction and
on while driving, pull to the side of stability enhancement.
When VSA activates, you may notice the road when it is safe, and turn off
that the engine does not respond to the engine. Reset the system by
the accelerator in the same way it restarting the engine. If the VSA
does at other times. system indicator stays on or comes
back on while driving, have the VSA
The VSA system cannot enhance the system inspected by your dealer.
vehicle’s driving stability in all
situations and does not control your
vehicle’s entire braking system. It is
still your responsibility to drive and
corner at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
218
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４２：４２３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２２４

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
VSA Off Switch VSA and Tire Sizes

In certain unusual conditions when Driving with varying tire or wheel
your vehicle gets stuck in shallow sizes may cause the VSA to
mud or fresh snow, it may be easier malfunction. When replacing tires,
to free it with the VSA temporarily make sure they are of the same size
switched off. When the VSA system and type as your original tires (see
is off, the traction control system is page 264 ).
also off. You should only attempt to
free your vehicle with the VSA off if If you install winter tires, make sure
you are not able to free it when the they are the same size as those that
VSA is on. were originally supplied with your
vehicle. Exercise the same caution
Driving
Immediately after freeing your during winter driving as you would if
vehicle, be sure to switch the VSA on This switch is under the left vent. your vehicle was not equipped with
again. We do not recommend driving Press it to turn the vehicle stability VSA.
your vehicle with the VSA and assist system on and off.
traction control systems switched off.
When VSA is off, the VSA activation
indicator comes on as a reminder.
VSA is turned on every time you

start the engine, even if you turned it
off the last time you drove the
vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
219
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４２：４９３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２２５

Towing a Trailer
Your vehicle has been designed to Load Limits

tow a trailer, as well as carrying
passengers and their cargo. To
safely tow a trailer, you should
carefully observe the load limits (see
page 199 ), use the proper equipment,
and follow the guidelines in this
section.
Be sure to read the Off-Highway

Driving Guidelines section on page
230 if you plan to tow off paved
surfaces.
Total Trailer Weight: The maximum Tongue Load: The weight that the
allowable weight of the trailer and tongue of a fully loaded trailer puts
Exceeding any load limit or everything in or on it depends on the on the hitch should be 5 to 10
improperly loading your vehicle number of occupants in your vehicle percent of the total trailer weight for
and trailer can cause a crash in and the type of trailer being towed boat trailers, and 8 to 15 percent of
which you can be seriously hurt (see page 223 ). total trailer weight for all other
or killed. trailers. (See page 223 for limits for
Towing a trailer that is too heavy can your towing situation). Too much
Check the loading of your seriously affect your vehicle’s tongue load reduces front-tire
vehicle and trailer carefully handling and performance. It can traction and steering control. Too
before starting to drive. also damage the engine and little tongue load can make the
drivetrain. trailer unstable and cause it to sway.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
220
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４２：５６３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２２６

Towing a Trailer
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating Gross Axle Weight Rating Gross Combined Weight Rating
(GVWR): (GAWR): (GCWR):
The maximum allowable weight of The maximum allowable weight of The maximum allowable weight of
the vehicle, all occupants, all the vehicle axles is: the fully loaded vehicle and trailer is
accessories, all cargo, and the 9,700 lbs (4,400 kg) with the proper
tongue load is: 4WD models: hitch and fluid coolers (see page
2,865 lbs (1,300 kg) 225 ).
4WD models: on the front axle
5,950 lbs (2,700 kg) 3,155 lbs (1,430 kg) The GCWR must be reduced 2
on the rear axle percent for every 1,000 feet (305
2WD models: meters) of elevation.
5,840 lbs (2,650 kg) 2WD models:
Driving
2,865 lbs (1,300 kg)
on the front axle
3,085 lbs (1,400 kg)
on the rear axle
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
221
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４３：０７３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２２７

Towing a Trailer
Estimating Loads To Estimate the Tongue Load

The best way to confirm that all 1. Park the vehicle on level ground. If the Estimated
loads are within limits is to check difference is: tongue load is:
them at a public scale. 2. Measure from the ground to the
For public scales in your area, check bottom of the trailer hitch. 1 ½’’ 150 lbs (68 kg)
your local phone book, or contact 2 ¼’’ 250 lbs (114 kg)
your trailer dealer or rental agency 3. Connect the fully loaded trailer to 3’’ 350 lbs (160 kg)
for assistance. the hitch. 3 ¾’’ 450 lbs (205 kg)
To help ensure a safe drive to a scale,
or if you cannot get to a public scale, 4. Measure again from the ground to
we recommend that you estimate the same spot on the bottom of the If the difference is more than 3 ¾
your total trailer weight and tongue hitch. inch, you have too much load on the
load as described. tongue. Redistribute the load or
5. Subtract the second measurement remove cargo as needed.
To Estimate the Total Trailer Weight from the first measurement, then
Add the weight of your trailer (as refer to the following table.
quoted by the manufacturer) with
everything in or on the trailer. Then
check the tables on page 223 to
make sure you do not exceed the
limit for your conditions.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
222
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４３：１６３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２２８

Towing a Trailer
Total Trailer Weight and Tongue Load Limits:

BOAT TRAILERS
Number of Equipped with transmission cooler and power steering fluid cooler.
Occupants Maximum Total Trailer Weight Maximum Tongue Load
2 4,500 lbs (2,045 kg) 450 lbs (205 kg)
3 4,500 lbs (2,045 kg) 450 lbs (205 kg)
4 4,500 lbs (2,045 kg) 450 lbs (205 kg)
5 4,300 lbs (1,945 kg) 350 lbs (160 kg)
6 4,100 lbs (1,855 kg) 220 lbs (100 kg)
7 2,000 lbs (905 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
8 Towing is Not Recommended
Driving
OTHER TYPES OF TRAILERS
Number of Equipped with transmission cooler and power steering fluid cooler.
Occupants Maximum Total Trailer Weight Maximum Tongue Load
2 3,500 lbs (1,590 kg) 450 lbs (205 kg)
3 3,500 lbs (1,590 kg) 450 lbs (205 kg)
4 3,300 lbs (1,490 kg) 450 lbs (205 kg)
5 3,100 lbs (1,400 kg) 350 lbs (160 kg)
6 2,700 lbs (1,220 kg) 220 lbs (100 kg)
7 1,200 lbs (540 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
8 Towing is Not Recommended
The corresponding weight limits assume occupants fill seats from the front of the vehicle to the back, each occupant weighs 150 lbs (70 kg) and each has 15 lbs (7 kg)
of luggage in the cargo area.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
223
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４３：２６３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２２９

Towing a Trailer
Checking Loads
To accurately check your loads at
the public scale, the vehicle and
trailer should be fully loaded, and all
occupants should stay in the vehicle
while the attendant watches the
scale.
2. Check the gross vehicle weight. 5. Check the gross combined weight.
Limit (4WD models): Limit: 9,700 lbs (4,400 kg)
5,950 lbs (2,700 kg) Remember, maximum gross
Limit (2WD models): combined weight should be
5,840 lbs (2,650 kg) decreased 2 % for every 1,000 feet
3. Check the rear gross axle weight. (305 meters) of elevation.
Limit (4WD models):
3,155 lbs (1,430 kg)
Limit (2WD models):
1. Check the front gross axle weight. 3,085 lbs (1,400 kg)
Limit: 2,865 lbs (1,300 kg) 4. If you cannot weigh the rear axle
directly, you can calculate the rear
gross axle weight by subtracting
the weight in step 1 from the
weight in step 2.
Limit (4WD models): 6. Check the weight of the hitched
3,086 lbs (1,400 kg) trailer. Write this number down.
Limit (2WD models):
2,976 lbs (1,350 kg)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
224
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４３：３７３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２３０

Towing a Trailer
Towing Equipment and Hitch

Accessories We strongly recommend that you
Towing generally requires a variety have your dealer install a Honda
of supplemental equipment. To hitch. Using non-Honda equipment
ensure the best quality, we may result in serious damage to your
recommend that you purchase vehicle.
Honda equipment whenever possible.
Transmission Fluid Cooler and
7. Check the weight of the unhitched Your dealer offers a trailer package Power Steering Fluid Cooler
trailer. Limit: See page 223 . that includes a hitch, a ball mount, a To help prevent overheating, a
wiring harness, a heavy-duty heavy-duty transmission fluid cooler
8. Calculate the tongue load. transmission fluid cooler, and a and a heavy-duty power steering
Driving
Subtract the weight in step 6 from heavy-duty power steering fluid fluid cooler are required for trailer
the weight in step 7. cooler. towing. These coolers are available
Limit: See page 223 . only from your dealer.
Recommended: see page 220 . Discuss any additional needs with
Range: 5-10% for boat trailers your trailer sales or rental agency, Weight Distributing Hitch
8-15% for other trailers and make sure all equipment is A weight distributing hitch is not
properly installed, maintained, and recommended for use with your
also meets state, federal, province, vehicle, as an improperly adjusted
and local regulations. weight distributing hitch may reduce
handling, stability, and braking
performance.
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
225
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／１８１４：０３：０３３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２３１

Towing a Trailer
Trailer Brakes Safety Chains Spare Tires

Honda requires that any trailer with Always use safety chains when you When towing a trailer, we
a total trailer weight of 1,000 lbs (455 tow a trailer. Make sure the chains recommend that you carry a full-size
kg) or more has its own brakes. are secured to the trailer and hitch, spare wheel and tire for your vehicle
and that they cross under the tongue and trailer. See page 267 for proper
There are two common types of and can catch the trailer if it tire size, page 276 for how to store a
trailer brakes: surge and electric. becomes unhitched. Leave enough full size wheel and tire, and page
Surge brakes are common for boat slack to allow the trailer to turn 273 for information on changing a
trailers, since the brakes will get wet. corners easily, but do not let the flat tire.
chains drag on the ground.
If you choose electric brakes, be Remember to unhitch the trailer
sure they are electronically actuated. Sway Control before changing a flat. Ask your
Do not attempt to tap into your This device is recommended if your trailer sales or rental agency where
vehicle’s hydraulic system. No trailer tends to sway. Your trailer and how to store the trailer’s spare
matter how successful it may seem, maker can tell you what kind of sway tire.
any attempt to attach trailer brakes control you need and how to install it.
to your vehicles hydraulic system
will lower braking effectiveness and Trailer Mirrors
create a potential hazard. Many states and provinces require
special exterior mirrors when towing
See your trailer dealer or rental a trailer. Even if they don’t, you
agency for more information on should install special mirrors if you
installing electric brakes. cannot clearly see behind you, or if
the trailer creates a blind spot.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
226
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４３：５８３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２３２

Towing a Trailer
To get to your vehicle’s trailer Pre-Tow Checklist

GROUND LEFT TURN SIGNAL
(BLACK) (GREEN/WHITE) lighting connector, open the tailgate, When preparing to tow, and before
remove the cargo cover, then driving away, be sure to check the
BATTERY POWER
(YELLOW) remove the rear panel trim. The following:
connector is on the left side.
The vehicle has been properly
We recommend that you have your serviced, and the tires, brakes,
dealer install a Honda wiring harness suspension, cooling system, and
and converter. This harness has lights are in good operating
BRAKE LIGHT
(WHITE/BLACK) been designed for your vehicle. condition.
RIGHT TURN SIGNAL TAILLIGHT
Since lighting and wiring vary with The trailer has been properly
Driving
(GREEN/YELLOW) (RED/BLACK)
trailer type and brand, you should serviced and is in good condition.
Trailer lights and equipment must also have a qualified mechanic install
comply with federal, state, province, a suitable connector between the All weights and loads are within
and local regulations. Check trailer vehicle and the trailer. limits.
light requirements for the areas
where you plan to tow, and use only Improper equipment or installation The hitch, safety chains, and any
equipment designed for your vehicle. can cause damage to your vehicle’s other attachments are secure.
Your vehicle is equipped with a electrical system and affect your
connector to install a trailer lighting vehicle warranty. All items in or on the trailer are
connector that mates with your properly secured and cannot shift
vehicle. while you drive.
Refer to the above illustration for
wiring information.
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
227
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４４：０８３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２３３

Towing a Trailer
Your vehicle tires and spare are For your safety and the safety of Making Turns and Braking
properly inflated, and the trailer others, take time to practice driving Make turns more slowly and wider
tires and spare are inflated as maneuvers before heading for the than normal. The trailer tracks a
recommended by the trailer open road, and follow the guidelines smaller arc than your vehicle, and it
maker. below. can hit or run over something the
vehicle misses. Allow more time and
Towing performance can be Break-In Period distance for braking. Do not brake or
affected by high altitude, high Avoid towing a trailer during your turn suddenly as this could cause the
temperature, or when climbing vehicle’s first 600 miles (1,000 km) trailer to jackknife or turn over.
steep grades. Therefore, premium (see page 188 ).
fuel (premium unleaded gasoline Driving on Hills
with pump octane number of 91 or Towing Speeds and Gears When climbing hills, closely watch
higher) is recommended when Drive slower than normal in all your temperature gauge. If it nears
towing more than 3,500 lbs (1,590 driving situations, and obey posted the red (Hot) mark, turn the air
kg). speed limits for vehicles with trailers. conditioning off, reduce speed and, if
When towing a fixed-sided trailer necessary, pull to the side of the
Driving Safely With a Trailer (e.g., camper), do not exceed 55 mph road to let the engine cool.
The added weight, length, and (88 km/h). At higher speeds, the
height of a trailer will affect your trailer may sway or affect vehicle If the automatic transmission shifts
vehicle’s handling and performance, handling. frequently while going up a hill, shift
so driving with a trailer requires to D3.
some special driving skills and To prevent the transmission from
techniques. shifting frequently, drive in the D
position.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
228
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４４：１７３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２３４

Towing a Trailer
When driving down hills, reduce Backing Up Towing Your Vehicle

your speed and shift down to D3. Do Always drive slowly and have Your vehicle is not designed to be
not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes. Remember, it someone guide you when backing up. towed behind a motor home. If your
takes longer to slow down and Grip the bottom of the steering vehicle needs to be towed in an
stop when towing a trailer. wheel; then turn the wheel to the left emergency, see page 285 .
to get the trailer to move to the left,
If you must stop when facing uphill, and turn the wheel right to move the
use the foot brake or parking brake. trailer to the right.
Do not try to hold the vehicle in
place by pressing on the accelerator, Parking
as this can cause the automatic Follow all normal precautions when
transmission to overheat. parking, including putting the
Driving
transmission in Park and firmly
Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting setting the parking brake. Also, place
Crosswinds and air turbulence wheel chocks at each of the trailer’s
caused by passing trucks can disrupt tires.
your steering and cause the trailer to
sway. When being passed by a large Retrieving a Boat
vehicle, keep a constant speed, and If the vehicle’s tires slip when
steer straight ahead. Do not try to retrieving a boat from the water,
make quick steering or braking shift to first gear, and turn on VTM-4
corrections. lock (see page 210 ). Disengage
VTM-4 lock as soon as the boat is
out of the water to prevent damage
to the VTM-4 system.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
229
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４４：２６３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２３５

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
General Information Important Safety Precautions

Your vehicle has been designed To avoid loss of control or rollover,
primarily for use on pavement. But Improperly operating this be sure to follow all precautions and
its higher ground clearance allows vehicle on or off-pavement can recommendations.
you to occasionally travel on unpaved cause an accident or rollover in
roads, such as campgrounds, picnic which you and your passengers Be sure to store cargo properly,
sites, and similar locations. It is not could be seriously injured or and do not exceed your vehicle
designed for trail-blazing, mountain killed. cargo load limits (see pages
climbing, or other challenging off- 199 and 220 ).
road activities. Follow all instructions and
guidelines in this owner’s Be aware that a heavy load can
If you decide to drive on unpaved manual. reduce ground clearance and your
roads, you will find that it requires Keep your speed low, and ability to clear obstacles.
somewhat different driving skills. don’t drive faster than
Your vehicle will also handle conditions permit. Whenever you drive, make sure
somewhat differently than it does on you and your passengers always
pavement. Be sure to pay extra wear seat belts.
attention to the precautions and tips
in this section, and get acquainted Keep your speed low, and never
with your vehicle before leaving the go faster than the conditions
pavement. allow.
It’s up to you to continually assess

the situation and drive within the
limits.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
230
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４４：３６３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２３６

Check Out Your Vehicle Accelerating and Braking Avoiding Obstacles

Before you leave the pavement, be For better traction on all surfaces, Debris in the road can damage your
sure to do all scheduled maintenance accelerate slowly and gradually build suspension or other components.
and service, and inspect your vehicle up speed. If you try to start too fast Because your vehicle has a high
for any problems. Pay special on wet soil, mud, snow, or ice, you center of gravity, driving over a large
attention to the condition of the tires, might not have enough traction to obstacle, or allowing a wheel to drop
and check the tire pressures. get underway, and you may dig into a deep hole can cause your
yourself a hole. Starting with the vehicle to tip or roll over.
After you return to the pavement, shift lever in second (2) gear will
carefully inspect your vehicle to help you have a smoother start on Driving on Slopes
make sure there is no damage that snow or ice. If you can’t clearly see all conditions
could make driving it unsafe. or obstacles on a slope, walk the
Driving
Recheck the condition of the tires Keep in mind that you will usually slope before you drive on it. If you
and the tire pressures. need more time and distance to have any doubt whether or not you
brake to a stop on unpaved surfaces. can safely drive on the slope, don’t
Remember Avoid hard braking. Do not ‘‘pump’’ do it. Find another route.
The route presents limits (too steep the brakes; let the anti-lock braking
or bumpy roads). You have limits system pump them for you. If you are driving up a hill and find
(driving skill and comfort). And your that you cannot continue, do not try to
vehicle has limits (traction, stability, turn around. Your vehicle could roll
and power). over. Slowly back down the hill,
following the same route you took up
Driving off-highway can be the hill.
hazardous if you fail to recognize
limits and take the proper
precautions.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
231
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４４：４６３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２３７

Crossing a Stream If you decide it is safe to drive If You Get Stuck

Before driving through water, stop, through water, choose a suitable If you get stuck, engage the VTM-4
get out if necessary, and make sure speed and engage the VTM-4 Lock. Lock (see page 210 ). Carefully try to
that: Proceed without shifting or changing go in the direction (forward or
The water is not deep enough to speeds, and do not stop the vehicle reverse) that you think will get you
cover your wheel hubs, axles, or or shut off the engine. unstuck. Do not spin the tires at high
exhaust pipe. You could stall and speeds. It will not help you get out
not be able to restart your engine. After driving through water, test and may cause damage to the
The water can also damage your brakes. If they got wet, gently transmission or VTM-4 system.
important vehicle components. ‘‘pump’’ them while driving slowly
until they operate normally. If you are still unable to free yourself,
The banks are sloped so you can your vehicle is equipped with front
drive out. If the water is deeper than the wheel and rear tow hooks designed for this
hubs, some additional service may purpose.
The water is not flowing too fast. be required. This service is not
Deep rushing water can sweep you covered by your warranties. Use a nylon strap to attach your
downstream. Even very shallow vehicle to the recovery vehicle, and
rushing water can wash the carefully take out the slack in the
ground from under your tires and strap. Once the strap is tight, the
cause you to lose traction and recovery vehicle should apply force.
possibly roll over. Remember that the recovery vehicle
needs good traction to avoid
The banks and surface under the becoming stuck, too.
water provide good traction. The
water may hide hazards such as
rocks, holes, or mud.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
232
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４４：５３３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２３８

You should never use a jack to try to Towing a Trailer Off-Road

get unstuck. Your vehicle could You may be able to safely tow a
easily slip off the jack and hurt you lightweight trailer (such as a
or someone else. motorcycle or small tent trailer) off-
road if you follow these guidelines.
Do not exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg)

or a tongue weight of 100 lbs (45
kg).
Stay on smooth, level dirt roads,

and avoid driving in hilly terrain.
Driving
Allow extra room for starting,
stopping, and turning.
Slow down if you encounter bumps

or other obstacles.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
233
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４４：５５３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２３９
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
234
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４５：００３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２４０
Main Menu
Maintenance
This section explains why it is Maintenance Safety ....................... 236

important to keep your vehicle well Maintenance Minder ..................... 237
maintained and how to follow basic Fluid Locations............................... 244
maintenance safety precautions. Adding Engine Oil ......................... 245
Changing the Engine Oil and
This section also includes Filter ............................................ 246
instructions on how to read the Engine Coolant ............................... 248
maintenance messages in the Windshield Washers ..................... 249
information display, and instructions Automatic Transmission Fluid..... 250
for simple maintenance tasks you Differential Oil ............................... 251
may want to take care of yourself. Transfer Assembly Fluid .............. 251
Timing Belt ..................................... 252
If you have the skills and tools to Brake Fluid ..................................... 252
perform more complex maintenance Power Steering Fluid ..................... 253
Maintenance
tasks on your vehicle, you may want Lights .............................................. 254
to purchase the service manual. See Floor Mats ...................................... 260
page 311 for information on how to Cleaning Seat Belts........................ 260
obtain a copy, or see your dealer. Wiper Blades .................................. 261
Wheels ............................................ 263
Tires ................................................ 263
Checking the Battery .................... 269
Vehicle Storage .............................. 270
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
235
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４５：１０３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２４１

Maintenance Safety
All service items not detailed in this Injury from moving parts. Do
section should be performed by a not run the engine unless
certified technician or qualified Improperly maintaining this instructed to do so.
mechanic. vehicle or failing to correct a
problem before driving can
Important Safety Precautions cause a crash in which you can
To eliminate potential hazards, read be seriously hurt or killed. Failure to properly follow
the instructions before you begin, maintenance instructions and
and make sure you have the tools Always follow the inspection, precautions can cause you to
and skills required. maintenance recommendations, be seriously hurt or killed.
Make sure your vehicle is parked and schedules in this owner’s
on level ground, the parking brake manual. Always follow the procedures
is set, and the engine is off. and precautions in this owner’s
manual.
To clean parts, use a commercially Potential Vehicle Hazards
available degreaser or parts Carbon Monoxide poison from
cleaner, not gasoline. engine exhaust. Be sure there is Some of the most important safety
adequate ventilation whenever you precautions are given here. However,
To reduce the possibility of fire or operate the engine. we cannot warn you of every
explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, conceivable hazard that can arise in
and flames away from the battery Burns from hot parts. Let the performing maintenance. Only you
and all fuel-related parts. engine and exhaust system cool can decide whether or not you
down before touching any parts. should perform a given task.
Wear eye protection and
protective clothing when working
with the battery or compressed air.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
236
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４５：１９３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２４２

Maintenance Minder
Your vehicle displays engine oil life Engine Oil Life Display The remaining engine oil life is
and maintenance service items on displayed on the information display
the information display to show you ENGINE OIL LIFE SELECT/RESET according to this table:
DISPLAY KNOB
when you should have your dealer
perform engine oil replacement and Calculated Engine Displayed
indicated maintenance service. Oil Life (%) Engine Oil Life (%)
100 %−91 % 100 %
Based on the engine operating 90 %−81 % 90 %
conditions and accumulated engine 80 %−71 % 80 %
revolutions, the onboard computer in 70 %−61 % 70 %
your vehicle calculates the remaining 60 %−51 % 60 %
engine oil life and displays it as a 50 %−41 % 50 %
percentage. 40 %−31 % 40 %
30 %−21 % 30 %
Maintenance
To see the current engine oil life, 20 %−16 % 20 %
turn the ignition switch to the ON 15 %−11 % 15 %
(II) position, and push and release 10 %−6 % 10 %
the select/reset knob repeatedly 5 %−1 % 5%
until the engine oil life display 0% 0%
appears (see page 70 ).
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
237
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４５：２５３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２４３

Maintenance Minder
MAINTENANCE ENGINE OIL LIFE

MINDER INDICATOR ‘‘SERVICE’’ MESSAGE
INDICATOR
MAINTENANCE
ITEM CODE(S)
If the remaining engine oil life is 15 The 15 and 10 percent oil life When the remaining engine oil life is
to 6 percent, you will see the engine indicators remind you that your 5 to 1 percent, you will see a
oil life indicator every time you turn vehicle will soon be due for ‘‘SERVICE’’ message along with the
the ignition switch to the ON (II) scheduled maintenance. same maintenance item code(s),
position. The maintenance minder every time you turn the ignition
indicator will also come on, and the switch to the ON (II) position.
maintenance item code(s) for other
scheduled maintenance items
needing service will be displayed
next to the engine oil life indicator.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
238
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４５：３５３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２４４

Maintenance Minder
The maintenance item code or codes

indicate the main and sub items
required at the time of the oil change
(see page 240 ).
You can switch the information

display from the engine oil life
display to the odometer or the trip
meter. Press and release the select/
reset knob on the instrument panel.
When the engine oil life is 15 to 1 NEGATIVE MILEAGE

percent, the maintenance minder
indicator ( ) comes on every
Maintenance
time you turn the ignition switch to When the remaining engine oil life is If you do not perform the indicated
the ON (II) position, then it goes out 0 percent, the engine oil life indicator maintenance, negative mileage is
if you switch the information display. will blink. The display comes on displayed and begins to blink after
every time you turn the ignition the vehicle has been driven 10 miles
When you see this message, have switch to the ON (II) position. The (10 km) or more.
the indicated maintenance maintenance minder indicator
performed by your dealer as soon as ( ) also comes on and remains Negative mileage means your
possible. on in the instrument panel. When vehicle has passed the maintenance
you see this message, immediately required point.
have the indicated maintenance done
by your dealer. Immediately have the indicated
maintenance done by your dealer.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
239
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４５：４４３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２４５

Maintenance Minder
You can change the information Maintenance Main Items and Sub Resetting the Engine Oil Life
display from the engine oil life Items Display
display to the odometer, the trip Your dealer will reset the display
meter, or the outside temperature (if MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM after completing the required
equipped) every time you press and maintenance service. You will see
release the select/reset knob. ‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the information
display the next time you turn the
When the engine oil life is 0 percent ignition switch to the ON (II)
or negative mileage, the position.
maintenance minder indicator
( ) remains on even if you If maintenance service is done by
change the information display. someone other than your dealer,
reset the maintenance minder as
Immediately have the service MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM follows:
performed, and make sure to reset
the display as described on the All maintenance items displayed on 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
following. the information display are in code. (II) position.
For an explanation of these
maintenance codes, see page 243 . 2. Press the select/reset knob
repeatedly until the engine oil life
is displayed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
240
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４５：５２３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２４６

Maintenance Minder
Important Maintenance
Precautions
If you have the required service
done but do not reset the display, or
reset the display without doing the
service, the system will not show the
proper maintenance intervals. This
can lead to serious mechanical
problems because you will no longer
have an accurate record of when
maintenance is needed.
Your authorized Honda dealer

3. Press the select/reset knob for 4. Press the select/reset knob for knows your vehicle best and can
Maintenance
about 10 seconds. The engine oil another 5 seconds. The provide competent, efficient service.
life and the maintenance item maintenance item code(s) will
code(s) will blink. disappear, and the engine oil life
will reset to ‘‘100.’’
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
241
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４６：０１３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２４７

Maintenance Minder
However, service at a dealer is not U.S. Vehicles: Engine oil level − Check every
mandatory to keep your warranties Maintenance, replacement, or time you fill the fuel tank. See
in effect. Maintenance may be done repair of emissions control page 191 .
by any qualified service facility or devices and systems may be done
person who is skilled in this type of by any automotive repair Engine coolant level − Check the
automotive service. Make sure to establishment or individual using radiator reserve tank every time
have the service facility or person parts that are ‘‘certified’’ to EPA you fill the fuel tank. See page 192 .
reset the display as previously standards.
described. Keep all receipts as proof Automatic transmission − Check
of completion, and have the person According to state and federal the fluid level monthly. See page
who does the work fill out your regulations, failure to perform 250 .
Honda Service History or Canadian maintenance on the items marked
Maintenance Log. Check your with ＃ will not void your emissions Brakes − Check the fluid level
warranty booklet for more warranties. However, all monthly. See page 252 .
information. maintenance services should be
performed in accordance with the Tires − Check the tire pressure
We recommend using Honda parts intervals indicated by the monthly. Examine the tread for
and fluids whenever you have information display. wear and foreign objects. See page
maintenance done. These are 264 .
manufactured to the same high Owner’s Maintenance Checks
quality standards as the original You should check the following Lights − Check the operation of
components, so you can be confident items at the specified intervals. If the headlights, parking lights,
of their performance and durability. you are unsure of how to perform taillights, high-mount brake light,
any check, turn to the appropriate turn signals, brake lights, and
page listed. license plate light monthly. See
page 254 .
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
242
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４６：０８３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２４８

Maintenance Minder
Symbol Maintenance Main Items Symbol Maintenance Sub Items

A Replace engine oil1 1 Rotate tires
B Replace engine oil1 and oil filter 2 Replace air cleaner element
Inspect front and rear brakes If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000 miles
Check parking brake adjustment (24,000 km).
Inspect these items: Replace dust and pollen filter
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations
Suspension components of soot in the air from industry and from diesel-powered vehicles,
Driveshaft boots replace every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS) Inspect drive belt
Maintenance Minder
All fluid levels and condition of fluids 3 Replace transmission and transfer fluid
Exhaust system＃ Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds or trailer
Fuel lines and connections＃ towing results in higher transmission and transfer fluid
temperatures. This requires transmission and transfer fluid
1: If the message ‘‘SERVICE’’ does not appear more than 12 months after the changes more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance
display is reset, change the engine oil every year. Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions,
have the transmission and transfer fluid changed every 30,000
＃ : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty on page 242 . miles (48,000 km).
4 Replace spark plugs
NOTE: Independent of the maintenance messages in the information display, Replace timing belt and inspect water pump
replace the brake fluid every 3 years. If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over 110°F, 43°C),
Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km). in very low temperatures (under−20°F,−29°C), or towing a trailer,
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy. replace every 60,000 miles (U.S.) /100,000 km (Canada).
Inspect valve clearance
5 Replace engine coolant
6 Replace VTM-4 rear differential fluid2
Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds or trailer
towing results in higher level of mechanical (shear) stress to fluid.
This requires differential fluid changes more frequently than
recommended by the Maintenance Minder. If you regularly drive
your vehicle under these conditions, have the differential fluid
changed at 7,500 miles (12,000 km), then every 15,000 miles
(24,000 km).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
ded
2b:y4WD
:
243
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４６：１１３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２４９

Fluid Locations
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK BRAKE FLUID

(Orange loop) (Gray cap)
WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)
ENGINE COOLANT
RESERVOIR
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
POWER STEERING FLUID (Yellow loop)
(Red cap)
RADIATOR CAP ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
244
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４６：１９３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２５０

Adding Engine Oil
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP Recommended Engine Oil The oil viscosity or weight is
Oil is a major contributor to your provided on the container’s label.
engine’s performance and longevity. 5W-20 oil is formulated for year-
Always use a premium-grade 5W-20 round protection of your vehicle to
detergent oil displaying the API improve cold weather starting and
Certification Seal. This seal indicates fuel economy.
the oil is energy conserving, and that
it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements. It is
highly recommended that you use
Honda motor oil in your vehicle.
Make sure the API Certification Seal
says ‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’
Unscrew and remove the engine oil
Maintenance
fill cap on top of the left valve cover.
Pour in the oil slowly and carefully so
you do not spill. Clean up any spills
immediately. Spilled oil could Ambient Temperature
damage components in the engine
compartment.
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and
tighten it securely. Wait a few
minutes, and recheck the oil level on
the engine oil dipstick. Do not fill
above the upper mark; you could API CERTIFICATION SEAL
damage the engine.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
245
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４６：２７３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２５１

Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
Synthetic Oil Changing the Engine Oil and

You may use a synthetic motor oil if Filter
it meets the same requirements Always change the oil and filter
given for a conventional motor oil: it according to the maintenance
displays the API certification seal, messages shown on the information
and it is the proper weight. You must display. The oil and filter collect
follow the oil and filter change contaminants that can damage your
intervals shown on the information engine if they are not removed
display. regularly.
Engine Oil Additives Changing the oil and filter requires

Your vehicle does not require any oil special tools and access from WASHER DRAIN BOLT
additives. Additives may adversely underneath the vehicle. The vehicle
affect the engine or transmission should be raised on a service station- 1. Run the engine until it reaches
performance and durability. type hydraulic lift for this service. normal operating temperature,
Unless you have the knowledge and then shut it off.
proper equipment, you should have
this maintenance done by a skilled 2. Open the hood, and remove the
mechanic. engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil
drain bolt and washer from the
bottom of the engine. Drain the oil
into an appropriate container.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
246
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４６：３６３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２５２

Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
OIL FILTER 4. Install a new oil filter according to 8. Let the engine run for several
the instructions that come with it. minutes, then check the drain bolt
Make sure to clean off any dirt and oil filter for leaks.
and dust on the connecting
surface of the engine block. 9. Turn off the engine and let it sit
for several minutes, then check
5. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, the oil level on the dipstick. If
then reinstall the drain bolt. necessary, add more oil.
Tighten the drain bolt to:
29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)
6. Refill the engine with the recom- Improper disposal of engine oil can be
mended oil. harmf ul to the environment. If you
3. Remove the oil filter, and let the change your own oil, please dispose of
Maintenance
remaining oil drain. A special Engine oil change capacity the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
wrench (available from your (including filter): container, and take it to a recycling
dealer) is required. 4.5 US qt (4.3 ) center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
or dump it on the ground.
Make sure the oil filter gasket is not 7. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap.
stuck to the engine block. If it is, Start the engine. The oil pressure
remove it before installing a new oil indicator should go out within 5
filter. seconds. If it does not, turn off the
engine, and check your work.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
247
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４６：４１３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２５３

Engine Coolant
Adding Engine Coolant Always use Honda Long-Life If the reserve tank is completely
Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. This empty, you should also check the
coolant is pre-mixed with 50 % coolant level in the radiator.
antifreeze and 50 % water. Never add
straight antifreeze or plain water.
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not Removing the radiator cap

available, you may use another while the engine is hot can
major-brand non-silicate coolant as a cause the coolant to spray out,
temporary replacement. Make sure it seriously scalding you.
is a high-quality coolant
recommended for aluminum engines. Always let the engine and
RESERVE TANK Continued use of any non-Honda radiator cool down before
coolant can result in corrosion, removing the radiator cap.
If the coolant level in the reserve causing the cooling system to
tank is at or below the MIN line, add malfunction or fail. Have the cooling
coolant to bring it up to between the system flushed and refilled with
MIN and MAX lines. Inspect the Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
cooling system for leaks. possible.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
248
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４６：５３３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２５４

Engine Coolant, Windshield Washers
4. The coolant level should be up to Windshield Washers

the base of the filler neck. Add Check the fluid level in the
coolant if it is low. windshield washer reservoir at least
monthly during normal use.
Pour the coolant slowly and On Canadian models: The low washer
carefully so you do not spill any. level indicator comes on when the
Clean up any spill immediately; it level is low (see page 67 ).
could damage components in the Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
engine compartment. windshield washer fluid. This
increases the cleaning capability and
5. Put the radiator cap back on and prevents freezing in cold weather.
tighten it. When you refill the reservoir, clean
RADIATOR CAP the edges of the windshield wiper
6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank. blades with windshield washer fluid
Maintenance
1. Make sure the engine and radiator Fill it to halfway between the MAX on a clean cloth. This will help to
are cool. and MIN marks. Put the cap back condition them.
on the reserve tank.
2. Relieve any pressure in the cooling
system by turning the radiator cap Do not add any rust inhibitors or Do not use engine antif reeze or a
counterclockwise, without other additives to your vehicle’s vinegar/water solution in the
pressing down. cooling system. They may not be windshield washer reservoir. Antif reeze
compatible with the coolant or can damage your vehicle’s paint, while
3. Remove the radiator cap by engine components. a vinegar/water solution can damage
pushing down and turning the windshield washer pump. Use only
counterclockwise. commercially-available windshield
washer f luid.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
249
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４７：０２３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２５５

Automatic Transmission Fluid
Automatic Transmission 5. If the level is below the lower

mark, remove the fill plug, then
DIPSTICK add the fluid into the fill hole to
bring it to the level between the
upper and lower marks on the
dipstick.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully

UPPER MARK so you do not spill any. Clean up
LOWER MARK any spill immediately; it could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
DIPSTICK
Always use Honda ATF-Z1
Check the fluid level with the engine 2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) (automatic transmission fluid).
at normal operating temperature. from the transmission, and wipe it
with a clean cloth.
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
Start the engine, let it run until the 3. Insert the dipstick all the way into
radiator fan comes on, then shut the transmission securely as
off the engine. For accurate shown in the illustration.
results, wait about 60 seconds (but
no longer than 90 seconds) before 4. Remove the dipstick and check
doing step 2. the fluid level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
250
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４７：１２３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２５６

Automatic Transmission Fluid, Differential Oil, Transfer Assembly Fluid
Differential Oil Put a new washer on the filler bolt,

4WD models only then reinstall the filler bolt and
Use only Honda Genuine ATF-Z1 tighten it securely. Tightening
(Automatic Transmission Fluid). Do FILLER BOLT torque:
not mix with other transmission f luids. 33 lbf·ft (45 N·m , 4.6 kgf·m)
Using transmission f luid other than
Honda Genuine ATF-Z1 may cause The rear differential should be
deterioration in transmission operation drained and refilled with new fluid
and durability, and could result in according to the maintenance
damage to the transmission. messages shown on the information
Damage resulting f rom the use of display. Have your dealer replace the
transmission f luid other than Honda rear differential fluid.
Genuine ATF-Z1 is not covered by the
Honda new vehicle warranty. Transfer Assembly Fluid
Maintenance
CORRECT LEVEL
The transfer assembly should be
6. Insert the dipstick all the way back Check the fluid level with the drained and refilled with new fluid
into the transmission securely as differential at normal operating when this service is indicated by a
shown in the illustration. temperature and the vehicle sitting maintenance message on the
on level ground. Remove the information display.
differential fluid filler bolt and
washer, and carefully feel inside the Always use Hypoid gear oil GL4 or
bolt hole with your finger. The fluid GL5 with a viscosity of SAE 90 or
level should be up to the edge of the 80W-90, and have your dealer
bolt hole. If it is not, slowly add replace the transfer assembly fluid.
VTM-4 Differential Fluid until it
starts to run out of the hole.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
251
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４７：２０３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２５７

Timing Belt, Brake Fluid
Timing Belt Brake Fluid MAX

The timing belt should be replaced Check the brake fluid level in the
according to the maintenance reservoir monthly.
message shown on the information Replace the brake fluid according to
display. Replace the belt at 60,000 the time recommendation in the
miles (100,000 km) if you regularly maintenance minder schedule.
drive your vehicle in one or more of
these conditions: Always use Honda Heavy Duty
In very high temperatures Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not
(over 110°F, 43°C). available, you should use only DOT 3
or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed
In very low temperatures container, as a temporary MIN
(under −20°F, −29°C). replacement.
The fluid level should be between
Frequently tow a trailer. Using any non-Honda brake fluid can the MIN and MAX marks on the side
cause corrosion and decrease the life of the reservoir. If the level is at or
of the system. Have the brake below the MIN mark, your brake
system flushed and refilled with system needs attention. Have the
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid brake system inspected for leaks or
DOT 3 as soon as possible. worn brake pads.
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not

compatible with your vehicle’s
braking system and can cause
extensive damage.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
252
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４７：２７３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２５８

Power Steering Fluid
UPPER LEVEL
Always use Honda Power Steering
Fluid. You may use another power
steering fluid as an emergency Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef t
replacement, but have the power or right lock and holding it there can
steering system flushed and refilled damage the power steering pump.
with Honda PSF as soon as possible.
A low power steering fluid level can

indicate a leak in the system. Check
the fluid level frequently, and have
the system inspected as soon as
LOWER LEVEL possible.
Check the level on the side of the
Maintenance
reservoir when the engine is cold.
The fluid should be between the
UPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.
If not add power steering fluid to the
UPPER LEVEL mark.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so

you do not spill any. Clean up any
spill immediately; it could damage
components in the engine
compartment.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
253
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４７：３７３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２５９

Lights
Headlight Aiming
The headlights were properly aimed
when your vehicle was new. If you
regularly carry heavy items in the
trunk, readjustment may be required.
Adjustment should be done by your
dealer or other qualified mechanic.
Replacing a Headlight Bulb

Your vehicle has halogen headlight
bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle TAB
it by its base, and protect the glass BULB CONNECTOR
from contact with your skin or hard
objects. If you touch the glass, clean 1. Open the hood. 4. Insert the new bulb into the hole,
it with denatured alcohol and a clean and turn it one-quarter turn
cloth. 2. Remove the electrical connector clockwise to lock it in place.
from the bulb by squeezing the
connector to unlock the tab, then 5. Push the electrical connector onto
slide the connector off the bulb. the new bulb.
Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot
when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch 3. Remove the bulb by turning it 6. Turn on the headlights to test the
on the glass can cause the bulb to approximately one-quarter turn new bulb.
overheat and shatter. counterclockwise.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
254
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４７：４８３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２６０

Lights
Replacing a Front Turn Signal 4. Insert the socket back into the 2. To remove a bulb, pull it straight
Bulb headlight assembly. Turn it out of its socket.
clockwise to lock it in place.
3. Install the new bulb into the
5. Turn on the lights to make sure socket.
the new bulb is working.
4. Insert the socket back into the
Replacing a Parking Light/Front headlight assembly. Turn it
Side Marker Light Bulbs clockwise to lock it in place.
5. Turn on the lights to make sure

SOCKET
Maintenance
BULB
1. Remove the socket from the

headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
2. To remove the front turn signal SOCKET

bulb, push it in slightly and turn it BULB
counterclockwise.
1. Remove the socket from the
3. Install the new bulb into the headlight assembly by turning it
socket and reinstall it. one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
255
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４７：５８３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２６１

Lights
Replacing a Side Turn Signal Bulb 5. Pull the burned out bulb straight
out of its socket.
Push the new bulb straight into
the socket until it bottoms.

turn signal assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
BULB
CLIPS SOCKET
8. Put the inner fender cover in place.
Install the three holding clips.
1. If you are changing the bulb on 3. Pull the inner fender cover away Lock each clip in place by pushing
the driver’s side, start the engine, from the fender. on the center.
turn the steering wheel all the way
to the left, and turn off the engine. 4. Remove the socket from the turn
If you are changing the bulb on signal assembly by turning it one-
the passenger’s side, turn the quarter turn counterclockwise.
steering wheel to the right.
2. Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to

remove the three holding clips
from the inner fender.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
256
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４８：０８３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２６２

Lights
Replacing a Fog Light Bulb 6. Turn on the lights to make sure

If equipped the new bulb is working.
7. Reinstall the mounting bolt on the

under cover.
BULB
BOLT
Maintenance
CONNECTOR
1. Use a wrench to remove the 3. Remove the electrical connector

mounting bolt from the underbody. from the bulb by pushing on the
tab and pulling the connector
2. Pull the under cover away from down.
the bumper.
4. Remove the bulb by turning it one-
quarter turn counterclockwise.
5. Insert the new bulb into the

assembly and turn it one-quarter
turn clockwise to lock it in place.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
257
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４８：１７３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２６３

Lights
Replacing Rear Bulbs Replacing a Back-up Light Bulb

SCREW BULB BULB
SOCKET
SOCKET
SCREW
1. Open the tailgate. 3. Remove the socket of the burned 1. Open the tailgate. Place a cloth on
out bulb by turning it one-quarter the edge of the cover. Remove the
2. Remove the two screws, then pull turn counterclockwise, and pull it covers by carefully prying on the
the rear light assembly straight straight out of its socket. edge with a small flat-tip
back to remove it from the body. screwdriver.
4. Install a new bulb into the socket,
and reinstall the socket into the 2. Remove the socket by turning it
light assembly. one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
258
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４８：２７３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２６４

Lights
3. Pull the burned out bulb straight Replacing the High-mount Brake
out of its socket. Light
Push the new bulb straight into
the socket until it bottoms.

light assembly. Turn it clockwise
to lock it in place.

BULB
6. Reinstall the back-up light cover.
SCREWS
Maintenance
SOCKET
1. Place a cloth on the middle edge 3. Pull the light assembly out of the
of a part of the lens on the tailgate.
passenger’s side. Remove a part of
the lens by carefully prying on its 4. Remove the socket from the light
edge with a small flip tipped assembly by turning it one-quarter
screwdriver. turn counterclockwise.
2. Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to 5. Pull the bulb straight out of its

remove the screw under the lens. socket. Push a new bulb into the
socket until it bottoms. Reinstall
the assembly.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
259
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４８：３５３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２６５

Floor Mats, Cleaning Seat Belts
Floor Mats If you use non-Honda floor mats, Cleaning Seat Belts
make sure they fit properly and that
they can be used with the floor mat LOOP
anchors. Do not put additional floor
mats on top of the anchored mats.
The floor mats that came with your If your seat belts get dirty, use a soft
vehicle hook over the floor mat brush with a mixture of mild soap
anchors. This keeps the floor mats and warm water to clean them. Do
from sliding forward, possibly not use bleach, dye, or cleaning
interfering with the pedals, or solvents. Let the belts air-dry before
backwards, making the front you use the vehicle.
passenger’s weight sensors Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat
ineffective. belt anchors can cause the belts to
retract slowly. Wipe the insides of
If you remove a floor mat, make sure the loops with a clean cloth
to re-anchor it when you put it back dampened in mild soap and warm
in your vehicle. water or isopropyl alcohol.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
260
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４８：４３３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２６６

Wiper Blades
Check the condition of the wiper WIPER ARMS

blades at least every 6 months.
Replace them if you find signs of
cracking in the rubber, areas that are
getting hard, or if they leave streaks
and unwiped areas when used.
LOCK TAB
1. Raise each wiper arm off the 2. Front only:
Maintenance
windshield, lifting the driver’s side Disconnect the blade assembly
first, then the passenger’s side. from the wiper arm by pushing in
the lock tab. Hold the lock tab in
while you push the blade assembly
toward the base of the arm.
Do not open the hood when the wiper
arms are raised, or you will damage the When replacing a wiper blade,
hood and wiper arms. make sure not to drop the wiper
blade or wiper arm down on the
windshield.
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
261
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４８：４９３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２６７

Wiper Blades
BLADE BLADE 5. Slide the new wiper blade into the

holder until the tabs lock.
6. Front only:
Slide the wiper blade assembly
onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.
7. Lower the wiper arm.
REINFORCEMENT
3. Remove the blade from its holder 4. Examine the new wiper blades. If
by grabbing the tabbed end of the they have no plastic or metal
blade. Pull up firmly until the tabs reinforcement along the back
come out of the holder. edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in
the slots along the edge of the new
blade.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
262
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４８：５８３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２６８

Wheels, Tires
Wheels Tires Inflation Guidelines

Clean the wheels as you would the To safely operate your vehicle, your Keeping the tires properly inflated
rest of the exterior. Wash them with tires must be the proper type and provides the best combination of
the same solution, and rinse them size, in good condition with adequate handling, tread life, and riding
thoroughly. tread, and correctly inflated. comfort.
Aluminum alloy wheels have a The following pages give more Underinflated tires wear unevenly,
protective clear-coat that keeps the detailed information on how to take adversely affect handling and fuel
aluminum from corroding and care of your tires and what to do economy, and are more likely to
tarnishing. Cleaning the wheels with when they need to be replaced. fail from being overheated.
harsh chemicals (including some
commercial wheel cleaners) or a stiff Overinflated tires can make your
brush can damage the clear-coat. To vehicle ride more harshly, are
clean the wheels, use a mild Using tires that are excessively more prone to damage from road
Maintenance
detergent and a soft brush or sponge. worn or improperly inflated can hazards, and wear unevenly.
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed. The tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) warns you when a tire
Follow all instructions in this pressure is low. See page 211 for
owner’s manual regarding tire more information.
inflation and maintenance.
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
263
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４９：０９３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２６９

Tires
Even though your vehicle is If you check air pressures when the Recommended Tire Pressures
equipped with TPMS, we tires are hot [driven for several miles The following chart shows the
recommend that you visually check (kilometers)], you will see readings 4 recommended cold tire pressures for
your tires every day. If you think a to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4 most normal driving conditions.
tire might be low, check it kgf/cm ) higher than the cold
immediately with a tire gauge. readings. This is normal. Do not let Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure
air out to match the recommended for Normal Driving
Use a gauge to measure the air cold air pressure. The tire will be P235/70R16 104S 32 psi (220 kPa ,
pressure in each tire at least once a underinflated. 2.2 kgf/cm )
month. Even tires that are in good
condition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to You should get your own tire The compact spare tire pressure is:
20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per pressure gauge and use it whenever 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
month. Remember to check the you check your tire pressures. This
spare tire at the same time. will make it easier for you to tell if a For convenience, the recommended
pressure loss is due to a tire problem tire sizes and cold tire pressures are
Check the air pressures when the and not due to a variation between on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
tires are cold. This means the gauges.
vehicle has been parked for at least 3 For additional information about
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 While tubeless tires have some your tires, see page 295 .
km). Add or release air, if needed, to ability to self-seal if they are
match the recommended cold tire punctured, you should look closely
pressures. for punctures if a tire starts losing
pressure.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
264
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４９：１９３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２７０

Tires
Tire Inspection Tire Service Life

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS
Every time you check inflation, you The service life of your tires is
should also examine the tires for dependent on many factors,
damage, foreign objects, and wear. including, but not limited to, driving
habits, road conditions, vehicle
You should look for: loading, inflation pressure,
maintenance history, speed, and
Bumps or bulges in the tread or environmental conditions (even
side of the tire. Replace the tire if when the tires are not in use).
you find either of these conditions.
In addition to your regular
Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side TREAD WEAR INDICATORS inspections and inflation pressure
of the tire. Replace the tire if you maintenance, it is recommended that
can see fabric or cord. Your tires have wear indicators you have annual inspections
Maintenance
molded into the tread. When the performed once the tires reach five
Excessive tread wear. tread wears down, you will see a 1/2 years old. It is also recommended
inch (12.7 mm) wide band across the that all tires, including the spare, be
tread. This shows there is less than removed from service after 10 years
1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left on from the date of manufacture,
the tire. regardless of their condition or state
of wear.
A tire this worn gives very little The last four digits of the TIN (tire
traction on wet roads. You should identification number) are found on
replace the tire if you can see three the sidewall of the tire and indicate
or more tread wear indicators. the date of manufacture (See Tire
Labeling on page 298 ).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
265
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４９：２７３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２７１

Tires
Tire Maintenance Tire Rotation Replacing Tires and Wheels

In addition to proper inflation, Replace your tires with radial tires of
correct wheel alignment helps to Front Front the same size, load range, speed
decrease tire wear. If you find a tire rating, and maximum cold tire
is worn unevenly, have your dealer pressure rating (as shown on the
check the wheel alignment. tire’s side wall).
Mixing radial and bias-ply tires on
Have your dealer check the tires if your vehicle can reduce braking
you feel a consistent vibration while ability, traction, and steering
driving. A tire should always be accuracy. Using tires of a different
rebalanced if it is removed from the size or construction can cause the
wheel. When you have new tires (For Non-directional (For Directional anti-lock brake and the vehicle
installed, make sure they are Tires and Wheels) Tires and Wheels) stability assist systems to work
balanced. This increases riding inconsistently.
comfort and tire life. For best results, To help increase tire life and
have the installer perform a dynamic distribute wear more evenly, rotate
balance. the tires according to the
maintenance messages displayed on
the information display.
Move the tires to the positions
Improper wheel weights can damage shown in the illustration each time
your vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Use they are rotated. If you purchase
only Honda wheel weights f or directional tires, rotate only front-to-
balancing. back.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
266
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４９：３５３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２７２

Tires
It is best to replace all four tires at Wheel and Tire Specifications

the same time. If that is not possible Wheels:
or necessary, replace the two front Installing improper tires on your 16 x 6 1/2 JJ
tires or two rear tires as a pair. vehicle can affect handling and
Replacing just one tire can seriously stability. This can cause a crash Tires:
affect your vehicle’s handling. in which you can be seriously P235/70R16 104S
hurt or killed.
If you ever replace a wheel, make See page 296 for information about
sure that the wheel’s specifications Always use the size and type of DOT Tire Quality Grading, and page
match those of the original wheels. tires recommended in this 298 for tire size and labeling
owner’s manual. information.
Also be sure you use only TPMS
specific wheels. If you do not, the
tire pressure monitoring system will
Maintenance
not work.
Replacement wheels are available at

your dealer.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
267
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４９：４３３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２７３

Tires
Winter Driving Tire Chains

Tires marked ‘‘M ＋ S’’ or ‘‘All Because your vehicle has limited tire
Season’’ on the sidewall have an all- clearance, mount only SAE Class ‘‘S’’ Traction devices that are the wrong
weather tread design suitable for cable-type traction devices, with size or improperly installed can
most winter driving conditions. rubber chain tensioners, on the front damage your vehicle’s brake lines,
tires. Use traction devices only when suspension, body, and wheels. Stop
For the best performance in snowy required by driving conditions or driving if they are hitting any part of
or icy conditions, you should install local laws. Make sure they are the the vehicle.
snow tires or tire chains. They may correct size for your tires. Metal link-
be required by local laws under type ‘‘chains’’ should not be used.
certain conditions.
When installing cables, follow the
Snow Tires manufacturer’s instructions, and
If you mount snow tires on your mount them as tight as you can.
vehicle, make sure they are radial Make sure they are not contacting
tires of the same size and load range the brake lines or suspension. Drive
as original tires. Mount snow tires on slowly with them installed. If you
all four wheels. The traction hear them coming into contact with
provided by snow tires on dry roads the body or chassis, stop and
may be lower than your original tires. investigate. Remove them as soon as
Check with the tire dealer for you begin driving on cleared roads.
maximum speed recommendations.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
268
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４９：５０３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２７４

Checking the Battery
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW Check the terminals for corrosion (a If you need to connect the battery to
white or yellowish powder). To a charger, disconnect both cables to
remove it, cover the terminals with a prevent damaging your vehicle’s
solution of baking soda and water. It electrical system. Always disconnect
will bubble up and turn brown. When the negative (−) cable first, and
this stops, wash it off with plain reconnect it last.
water. Dry off the battery with a
cloth or paper towel. Coat the
terminals with grease to help prevent
further corrosion. The battery gives off explosive
hydrogen gas during normal
If additional battery maintenance is operation.
needed, see your dealer or a
Check the condition of the battery qualified technician. A spark or flame can cause the
Maintenance
monthly by looking at the test battery to explode with enough
indicator window. The label on the WARNING: Battery posts, force to kill or seriously hurt you.
battery explains the test indicator’s terminals, and related accessories
colors. contain lead and lead compounds. Wear protective clothing and a
Wash your hands after handling. face shield, or have a skilled
technician do the battery
maintenance.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
269
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：４９：５８３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２７５

Vehicle Storage
If you need to park your vehicle for Block the rear wheels. Cover the vehicle with a
an extended period (more than 1 ‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made
month), there are several things you If the vehicle is to be stored for a from a porous material such as
should do to prepare it for storage. longer period, it should be cotton. Non-porous materials, such
Proper preparation helps prevent supported on jackstands so the as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
deterioration and makes it easier to tires are off the ground. which can damage the paint.
get your vehicle back on the road. If
possible, store your vehicle indoors. Leave one window open slightly (if If possible, periodically run the
the vehicle is being stored engine until it reaches full
Fill the fuel tank. indoors). operating temperature (the
cooling fans cycle on and off
Wash and dry the exterior Disconnect the battery. twice). Preferably, do this once a
completely. month.
Support the front wiper blade
Clean the interior. Make sure the arms with a folded towel or rag so
carpeting, floor mats, etc., are they do not touch the windshield.
completely dry.
To minimize sticking, apply a
Leave the parking brake off. Put silicone spray lubricant to all door
the transmission in Park. and tailgate seals. Also, apply a
vehicle body wax to the painted
surfaces that mate with the door
and tailgate seals.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
270
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：５０：０２３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２７６
Main Menu
Taking Care of the Unexpected
This section covers the more Compact Spare Tire....................... 272

common problems that motorists Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 273
experience with their vehicles. It If the Engine Won’t Start .............. 277
gives you information about how to Jump Starting ................................. 278
safely evaluate the problem and what If the Engine Overheats ............... 280
to do to correct it. If the problem has Low Oil Pressure Indicator .......... 282
stranded you on the side of the road, Charging System Indicator........... 282
you may be able to get going again. Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........ 283
If not, you will also find instructions Brake System Indicator ................ 284
on getting your vehicle towed. Emergency Towing ....................... 285
Fuses ............................................... 285
Fuse Locations ............................... 289

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
271
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／１０１７：３９：１５３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２７７

Compact Spare Tire
Use the compact spare tire as a Follow these precautions: INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS
temporary replacement only. Get
your regular tire repaired or replaced, Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
and put it back on your vehicle as
soon as you can. This tire gives a harsher ride and
less traction on some road
Check the inflation pressure of the surfaces. Use greater caution
compact spare tire every time you while driving.
check the other tires. It should be
inflated to: Do not mount snow chains on the
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm ) compact spare tire.
TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR
Do not use your compact spare
tire on another vehicle unless it is Replace the tire when you can see
the same make and model. the tread wear indicator bars. The
replacement should be the same size
After the flat tire is replaced with and design tire, mounted on the
the spare tire, the low tire same wheel. The spare tire is not
pressure indicator stays on. After designed to be mounted on a regular
several miles (kilometers) driving wheel, and the spare wheel is not
with the spare, the TPMS designed for mounting a regular tire.
indicator comes on and the low
tire pressure indicator goes off.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
272
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：５０：１９３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２７８

Changing a Flat Tire
If you have a flat tire while driving, TOOLS JACK

stop in a safe place to change it.
Drive slowly along the shoulder until
you get to an exit or an area to stop
that is far away from the traffic lanes.
The vehicle can easily roll off

the jack, seriously injuring
anyone underneath.
SPARE TIRE COVER
Follow the directions for
changing a tire exactly, and 1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and 3. The tools and jack are behind a
never get under the vehicle non-slippery ground. Put the cover in the cargo area on the
when it is supported only by the transmission in Park. Apply the driver’s side. Remove the cover by

jack. parking brake. pushing the top of the cover.
If you are towing a trailer, unhitch
it. 4. Turn the jack’s end bracket
counterclockwise to loosen it, then
2. Turn on the hazard warning lights, remove the jack and tools.
and turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Have all
passengers get out of the vehicle
while you change the tire.
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
273
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：５０：２８３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２７９

WHEEL NUT WRENCH
BRACKET JACKING POINT
6. Put the wheel nut wrench on the 9. Place the jack under the jacking
hoist shaft. Turn the wrench point nearest the tire you need to
The wheel nut wrench supplied with counterclockwise to lower the change. Turn the end bracket
your vehicle is specially adapted to f it spare tire to the ground. Keep clockwise until the top of the jack
the hoist shaf t. Do not use any other turning the wheel nut wrench to contacts the jacking point. Make
tool. create slack in the cable. sure the jacking point tab is
resting in the jack notch.
5. The spare tire is stored 7. Remove the bracket from the
underneath the rear cargo area. spare tire.
Remove the plastic cover on the
cargo area lining to access the 8. Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn
shaft for the spare tire hoist. with the wheel nut wrench.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
274
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：５０：３８３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２８０

EXTENSION
WHEEL NUT WRENCH BRAKE HUB
10. Use the extension and the wheel 12. Before mounting the spare tire, 14. Lower the vehicle to the ground,
nut wrench as shown to raise the wipe any dirt off the mounting and remove the jack.
vehicle until the flat tire is off the surface of the wheel and hub with 15. Tighten the wheel nuts securely in

ground. a clean cloth. Wipe the hub the same crisscross pattern. Have
carefully; it may be hot from the wheel nut torque checked at
11. Remove the wheel nuts and the driving. the nearest automotive service
flat tire. Temporarily place the flat 13. Put on the spare tire. Put the facility.
tire on the ground with the outside wheel nuts back on finger-tight, Tighten the wheel nuts to:
surface of the wheel facing up. then tighten them in a crisscross 80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)
pattern with the wheel nut wrench 16. Remove the center cap from the
until the wheel is firmly against flat tire, and place the flat tire up
the hub. Do not try to tighten the under the hoist.
wheel nuts fully. CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
275
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：５０：４６３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２８１

WHEEL NUT WRENCH 19. Turn the wheel nut wrench

clockwise until the flat tire rests
against the underbody of the Loose items can fly around the
vehicle and you hear the hoist interior in a crash and could
click. seriously injure the occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools

securely before driving.
Always raise the spare tire hoist, even
if you are not stowing a tire. If the
hoist is lef t down, it will be damaged
during driving and need to be replaced.
17. Insert the hoist bracket into the 20. Store the jack in its holder. Turn
center hole of the flat tire. the jack’s end bracket to lock it in
place. Replace the cover. Store the
18. Slowly turn the wheel nut wrench tools.
clockwise to take up the slack of
the hoist cable. Make sure the 21. Refer to Changing a Tire with
bracket is seated in the center TPMS (see page 213 ).
hole of the flat tire.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
276
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：５０：５５３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２８２

If the Engine Won’t Start
Diagnosing why the engine won’t Check the transmission interlock. If the headlights dim noticeably or
start falls into two areas, depending The transmission must be in Park go out when you try to start the
on what you hear when you turn the or neutral or the starter will not engine, either the battery is
ignition switch to the START (III) operate. discharged or the connections are
position: corroded. Check the condition of
You hear nothing, or almost Turn the ignition switch to the ON the battery and terminal
nothing. The engine’s starter (II) position. Turn on the connections (see page 269 ). You
motor does not operate at all, or headlights, and check their can then try jump starting the
operates very slowly. brightness. If the headlights are vehicle from a booster battery
very dim or do not come on at all, (see page 278 ).
You can hear the starter motor the battery is discharged. See
operating normally, or the starter Jump Starting on page 278 . The Starter Operates Normally
motor sounds like it is spinning In this case, the starter motor’s
faster than normal, but the engine Turn the ignition switch to the speed sounds normal, or even faster
does not start up and run. START (III) position. If the than normal, when you turn the
headlights do not dim, check the ignition switch to the START (III)

Nothing Happens or the Starter condition of the fuses. If the fuses position, but the engine does not run.
Motor Operates Very Slowly are OK, there is probably
When you turn the ignition switch to something wrong with the Are you using the proper starting
the START (III) position, you do not electrical circuit for the ignition procedure? Refer to Starting the
hear the normal noise of the engine switch or starter motor. You will Engine on page 205 .
trying to start. You may hear a need a qualified technician to
clicking sound, a series of clicks, or determine the problem. See
nothing at all. Emergency Towing on page 285 .
Check these things:
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
277
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：５１：０５３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２８３

If the Engine Won’t Start, Jump Starting
Are you using a properly coded Jump Starting 1. To jump start your vehicle:
key? An improperly coded key will Although this seems like a simple Open the hood, and check the
cause the immobilizer system procedure, you should take several physical condition of the battery.
indicator in the instrument panel precautions. In very cold weather, check the
to blink rapidly (see page 64 ). condition of the electrolyte. If it
seems slushy or frozen, do not try
Do you have fuel? Check the fuel jump starting until it thaws.
gauge; the low fuel indicator may A battery can explode if you do
not be working. not follow the correct procedure,
seriously injuring anyone
There may be an electrical nearby. If a battery sits in extreme cold, the
problem, such as no power to the electrolyte inside can f reeze.
fuel pump. Check all the fuses Keep all sparks, open flames, Attempting to jump start with a f rozen
(see page 285 ). and smoking materials away battery can cause it to rupture.
from the battery.
If you find nothing wrong, you will 2. Turn off all electrical accessories:
need a qualified mechanic to find the heater, A/C, climate control, audio
problem. See Emergency Towing You cannot start your vehicle by system, lights, etc. Put the
on page 285 . pushing or pulling it. transmission in Park, and set the
parking brake.
3. Connect one jumper cable to the

positive (＋) terminal on your
battery. Connect the other end to
the positive (＋) terminal on the
booster battery.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
278
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：５１：１２３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２８４

Jump Starting
5. If the booster battery is in another Keep the ends of the jumper cables
vehicle, have an assistant start away from each other and any metal
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle. on the vehicle until everything is
disconnected. Otherwise, you may
6. Start the vehicle. If the starter cause an electrical short.
motor still operates slowly, check
that the jumper cables have good
metal-to-metal contact.
7. Once your vehicle is running,

disconnect the negative cable from
your vehicle, then from the
booster battery. Disconnect the
4. Connect the second jumper cable positive cable from your vehicle,
to the negative (−) terminal on then from the booster battery.
the booster battery. Connect the

other end to the grounding strap
as shown. Do not connect this
jumper cable to any other part of
the engine.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
279
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：５１：２１３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２８５

If the Engine Overheats
The pointer of your vehicle’s 3. If you do not see steam or spray,

temperature gauge should stay in leave the engine running and
the midrange under most conditions. Steam and spray from an watch the temperature gauge. If
If it climbs to the red mark, you overheated engine can the high heat is due to overloading,
should determine the reason (hot seriously scald you. the engine should start to cool
day, driving up a steep hill, etc.). down almost immediately. If it
If your vehicle overheats, you should Do not open the hood if steam does, wait until the temperature
take immediate action. The only is coming out. gauge comes down to the midpoint,
indication may be the temperature then continue driving.
gauge climbing to or above the red
mark. Or you may see steam or 1. Safely pull to the side of the road. 4. If the temperature gauge stays at
spray coming from under the hood. Put the transmission in Park, and the red mark, turn off the engine.
set the parking brake. Turn off all
accessories, and turn on the 5. Look for any obvious coolant leaks,
hazard warning lights. such as a split radiator hose.
Driving with the temperature gauge Everything is still extremely hot,
pointer at the red mark can cause 2. If you see steam and/or spray so use caution. If you find a leak, it
serious damage to the engine. coming from under the hood, turn must be repaired before you
off the engine. Wait until you see continue driving (see Emergency
no more signs of steam or spray, Towing on page 285 ).
then open the hood.
6. If you don’t find an obvious leak,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank (see page
192 ). Add coolant if the level is
below the MIN mark.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
280
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：５１：２６３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２８６

If the Engine Overheats
7. If there was no coolant in the 8. Using gloves or a large heavy 10. Put the radiator cap back on
reserve tank, you may need to add cloth, turn the radiator cap tightly. Run the engine, and check
coolant to the radiator. Let the counterclockwise, without pushing the temperature gauge. If it goes
engine cool down until the pointer down, to the first stop. After the back to the red mark, the engine
reaches the middle of the tempera- pressure releases, push down on needs repair (see Emergency
ture gauge, or lower, before check- the cap, and turn it until it comes Towing on page 285 ).
ing the radiator. off.
11. If the temperature stays normal,
9. Start the engine, and set the check the coolant level in the
interior temperature to maximum. radiator reserve tank. If it has
Removing the radiator cap Add coolant to the radiator up to gone down, add coolant to the
while the engine is hot can the base of the filler neck. If you MAX mark. Put the cap back on
cause the coolant to spray out, do not have the proper coolant tightly.
seriously scalding you. mixture available, you can add
plain water. Remember to have
Always let the engine and the cooling system drained and

radiator cool down before refilled with the proper mixture as
removing the radiator cap. soon as you can.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
281
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：５１：３５３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２８７

Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator
Low Oil Pressure Indicator 1. Safely pull off the road, and shut Charging System Indicator
This indicator should never off the engine. Turn on the hazard If the charging system
come on when the engine is warning lights. indicator comes on brightly
running. If it starts flashing or stays when the engine is running, the
on, the oil pressure has dropped very 2. Let the vehicle sit for a minute. battery is not being charged.
low or lost pressure. Serious engine Open the hood, and check the oil
damage is possible, and you should level (see page 191 ). An engine Immediately turn off all electrical
take immediate action. very low on oil can lose pressure accessories. Try not to use other
during cornering and other driving electrically operated controls such as
maneuvers. the power windows. Keep the engine
running; starting the engine will
Running the engine with low oil 3. If necessary, add oil to bring the discharge the battery rapidly.
pressure can cause serious mechanical level back to the full mark on the
damage almost immediately. Turn of f dipstick (see page 245 ). Go to a service station or garage
the engine as soon as you can saf ely get where you can get technical
the vehicle stopped. 4. Start the engine and watch the oil assistance.
pressure indicator. If it does not go
out within 10 seconds, turn off the
engine. There is a mechanical
problem that needs to be repaired
before you can continue driving
(see Emergency Towing on page
285 ).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
282
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：５１：４２３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２８８

Malfunction Indicator Lamp
If this indicator comes on If the battery in your vehicle has

while driving, it means one been disconnected or gone dead,
of the engine’s emission control If you keep driving with the these codes may be erased. It takes
systems may have a problem. Even malf unction indicator lamp on, you can several days of driving under various
though you may feel no difference in damage your vehicle’s emissions conditions to set the codes again.
your vehicle’s performance, controls and the engine. Those repairs
continued operation may cause may not be covered by your vehicle’s To check if they are set, turn the
serious damage. warranties. ignition switch to the ON (II)
position without starting the engine.
If you have recently refueled your If the malfunction indicator lamp The malfunction indicator lamp will
vehicle, the indicator coming on comes on along with the ‘‘D’’ come on for 20 seconds. If it then
could be due to a loose or missing indicator, there is a problem in the goes off, the readiness codes are set.
fuel fill cap. You will also see a automatic transmission control If it blinks 5 times, the readiness
‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message on system. codes are not set. If possible, do not
the information display. Tighten the take your vehicle for a state
cap until it clicks at least once. Readiness Codes emissions test until the readiness

Tightening the cap will not turn the Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness codes are set. Refer to Emissions
indicator off immediately; it can take codes’’ that are part of the on-board Testing for more information (see
several days of normal driving. diagnostics for the emissions page 305 ).
systems. In some states, part of the
If the indicator comes on repeatedly, emissions testing is to make sure
even though it may turn off as you these codes are set. If they are not
continue driving, have your vehicle set, the test cannot be completed.
checked by your dealer as soon as
possible.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
283
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：５１：４９３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２８９

Brake System Indicator
U.S. Canada The brake system However, if the brake pedal does not If you must drive the vehicle a short
indicator normally feel normal, you should take distance in this condition, drive
comes on when immediate action. A problem in one slowly and carefully.
you turn the ignition switch to the part of the system’s dual circuit
ON (II) position and as a reminder to design will still give you braking at If the ABS indicator and the VSA
check the parking brake. It will stay two wheels. You will feel the brake system indicator come on with the
on if you do not fully release the pedal go down much farther before brake system indicator, have your
parking brake. the vehicle begins to slow down, and vehicle inspected by your dealer
you will have to press harder on the immediately.
If the brake system indicator comes pedal.
on while driving, the brake fluid level
is probably low. Press lightly on the Slow down by shifting to a lower
brake pedal to see if it feels normal. gear, and pull to the side of the road
If it does, check the brake fluid level when it is safe. Because of the long
the next time you stop at a service distance needed to stop, it is
station (see page 252 ). hazardous to drive the vehicle. You
should have it towed, and repaired as
If the fluid level is low, take your soon as possible (see Emergency
vehicle to a dealer, and have the Towing on page 285 ).
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
284
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：５１：５６３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２９０

Emergency Towing, Fuses
Emergency Towing On 4WD models Fuses

If your vehicle needs to be towed,
call a professional towing service or DRIVER’ S SIDE INTERIOR
organization. Never tow your vehicle Towing with only two tires on the
with just a rope or chain. It is very ground will damage parts of the 4WD
dangerous. system. It should be transported on a
f lat-bed truck or trailer.
The only way you can safely tow
your vehicle is with flat-bed
equipment. The operator will load
your vehicle on the back of a truck.
Any other method of towing will
damage the drive system. When you
contact the towing agency, inform
them a flat-bed is required. The vehicle’s fuses are located in
four fuse boxes. The interior fuse

boxes are located under the
dashboard on the driver’s and
passenger’s side.
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
285
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：５２：０５３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２９１

Fuses
PASSENGER’ S SIDE INTERIOR Checking and Replacing Fuses

If something electrical in your
vehicle stops working, the first thing
you should check for is a blown fuse.
Determine from the chart on pages
289 and 290 , or the diagram on the
fuse box lid, which fuse or fuses
control that device. Check those
UNDER- fuses first, but check all the fuses
HOOD before deciding that a blown fuse is
FUSE the cause. Replace any blown fuses,
BOX and check if the device works.
To open the passenger’s side fuse 1. Turn the ignition switch to the
box, pull the right edge of the cover. LOCK (0) position. Make sure the
headlights and all other
The primary under-hood fuse box is accessories are off.
on the passenger’s side. To open it,
push the tabs as shown. 2. Remove the cover from the fuse
box.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
286
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：５２：１２３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２９２

Fuses
FUSE PULLER BLOWN
BLOWN
3. Check each of the large fuses in 4. Check the smaller fuses in the 5. Look for a blown wire inside the
the primary under-hood fuse box under-hood fuse box and all the fuse. If it is blown, replace it with
by looking through the top at the fuses in the interior fuse boxes by one of the spare fuses of the same

wire inside. Remove the screws pulling out each fuse with the fuse rating or lower.
with a Phillips-head screwdriver. puller.
The fuse puller is in the primary

under-hood fuse box.
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
287
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：５２：２１３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２９３

Fuses
If you cannot drive the vehicle 6. If the replacement fuse of the Trailer Fuses
without fixing the problem, and you same rating blows in a short time, If a trailer light is burned out, check
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse there is probably a serious if these fuses are blown when you
of the same rating or a lower rating electrical problem with your replace the light bulbs:
from one of the other circuits. Make vehicle. Leave the blown fuse in Primary under-hood fuse box
sure you can do without that circuit that circuit, and have your vehicle fuses 5, 7, and 24
temporarily (such as the accessory checked by a qualified technician. Interior driver’s side fuse box: 10
power socket or radio). Interior passenger’s side fuse box:
If the driver’s power window fuse is 10
If you replace the blown fuse with a removed, the AUTO function of the
spare fuse that has a lower rating, it driver’s window may be disabled. If those fuses are OK, but the trailer
might blow out again. This does not You should reset the AUTO feature, lights still do not work, there are two
indicate anything wrong. Replace the (see page 95 ). blown 7.5 amp fuses in the trailer
fuse with one of the correct rating as hitch wiring. To access the 7.5 amp
soon as you can. Except for LX models fuses:
If the radio fuse is removed, the 1. Open the tailgate and remove the
audio system will disable itself. The cargo floor lid.
next time you turn on the radio you 2. Pull out the bottom of the tailgate
Replacing a f use with one that has a will see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in the rubber seal.
higher rating greatly increases the frequency display. Use the preset 3. Remove rear trim panel by pulling
chances of damaging the electrical buttons to enter the digit code (see up on the inside edge of the rear
system. If you do not have a page 141 ). trim panel, and unhooking the four
replacement f use with the proper rating clips and tabs.
f or the circuit, install one with a lower 4. After replacing fuses, and reinstall
rating. the rear trim panel in the reverse
order of removal.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
288
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：５２：３１３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２９４

Fuse Locations
PRIMARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

No. Amps. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits Protected
1 20 A Spare Fuse 14 30 A Rear A/C

2 30 A Spare Fuse 15 40 A Heater Motor
3 20 A Right Headlight 16 30 A Cooling Fan
4 15 A ACG S 17 7.5 A Spare Fuse
5 15 A Hazard 18 10 A Spare Fuse
6 − Not used 19 15 A Spare Fuse
7 20 A Stop, Horn 20 120 A Battery
8 20 A Left Headlight 21 30 A Condenser Fan
9 20 A Radio 22 7.5 A MG Clutch
10 40 A Power Window Motor 23 50 A IGI Main
11 40 A Power Seat 24 − Trailer (accessory)
12 30 A Rear Defroster
13 40 A Back Up, ACC

SECONDARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
1 20 A AC INVERTER 7 15 A ETCS
2 40 A VSA F/S Relay 8 15 A IG Coil
3 30 A VSA Motor 9 15 A LAF
4 20 A VTM-4 10 7.5 A TPMS
5 10 A ACM 11 (20 A) (FR FOG)
6 15 A Rear Accessory Socket CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
289
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：５２：３９３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２９５

Fuse Locations
INTERIOR FUSE BOX

Driver’s Side Passenger’s Side

Front
1 15 A Fuel Pump Front 1 20 A Driver’s Power Window
2 10 A SRS 2 20 A Driver’s Power Seat Reclining
3 7.5 A Heater Control, A/C Clutch 3 20 A Heated Seat
Relay, Cooling Fan Relay 4 20 A Driver’s Power Seat Sliding
4 7.5 A Power Mirror, ABS 5 − Not used
5 10 A Daytime Running Light＊ 6 10 A Daytime Running Light＊
6 15 A ECU (PCM), Cruise Control 7 20 A Driver’s side Rear Power
7 7.5 A OPDS, Rear Wiper Window
8 7.5 A ACC Relay 8 20 A Front Passenger’s Power
9 10 A Back-up Lights, Instrument Window
Lights 9 15 A Front Accessory Socket
10 7.5 A Turn Signals 10 15 A Small Light
11 7.5 A VTM-4 11 10 A Interior Light
12 30 A Front Wiper 12 20 A Power Door Lock
13 − Not used 13 7.5 A Back Up
14 7.5 A Moonroof
＊ : Canadian models 15 20 A Moonroof
16 20 A Passenger’s Side Rear Power
Window
＊ : Canadian models
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
290
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：５２：４３３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２９６
Main Menu
Technical Information
The diagrams in this section give Identification Numbers ................. 292 Three Way Catalytic
you the dimensions and capacities of Specifications ................................. 294 Converter ............................ 303
your vehicle and the locations of the DOT Tire Quality Grading ........... 296 Replacement Parts..................... 303
identification numbers. It also Uniform Tire Quality Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 304
includes information you should Grading ................................... 296 Emissions Testing ......................... 305
know about your vehicle’s tires and Treadwear .................................. 296 Testing of Readiness Codes ..... 305
emissions control systems. Traction....................................... 296
Temperature .............................. 297
Tire Labeling .................................. 298
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) − Required
Federal Explanation .............. 300
Emissions Controls........................ 302
The Clean Air Act ...................... 302
Crankcase Emissions Control
System..................................... 302
Evaporative Emissions Control
System..................................... 302
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery ................................. 302
Exhaust Emissions Controls .... 303
PGM-FI System ..................... 303
Ignition Timing Control
System................................. 303
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
(EGR) System .................... 303
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
291
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：５２：４７３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２９７

Identification Numbers
Your vehicle has several identifying

numbers in various places. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number

(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
dealer uses to register your vehicle
for warranty purposes. It is also
necessary for licensing and insuring
your vehicle. The easiest place to
find the VIN is on a plate fastened to
the top of the dashboard. You can
see it by looking through the
windshield on the driver’s side. It is
also on the certification label
attached to the driver’s doorjamb,
and is stamped on the engine
compartment bulkhead. The VIN is
also provided in bar code on the
certification label.
CERTIFICATION LABEL
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
292
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：５２：５２３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２９８

Identification Numbers
The engine number is stamped into

the engine block. It is on the front. ENGINE NUMBER
The transmission number is on a

label on top of the transmission.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
293
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：５３：１１３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００２９９

Specifications
Dimensions Capacities
Length 188.0 in (4,775 mm) Fuel tank Approx.
Width 76.5 in (1,943 mm) ＊1 20.34 US gal (77.0 )
77.5 in (1,968 mm) ＊2 Engine Change ＊1
1.93 US gal (7.3 )
Height 4WD 70.5 in (1,790 mm) ＊1 coolant Total 2.43 US gal (9.2 )
71.7 in (1,821 mm) ＊2 Engine oil Change＊2
2WD 70.1 in (1,780 mm) ＊1 Including 4.5 US qt (4.3 )
71.3 in (1,811 mm) ＊2 filter
Wheelbase 106.3 in (2,700 mm) Without 4.2 US qt (4.0 )
Track 4WD Front 66.3 in (1,685 mm) filter
Rear 66.5 in (1,690 mm) Total 5.3 US qt (5.0 )
2WD Front 66.5 in (1,690 mm) Automatic Change
Rear 66.7 in (1,694 mm) transmission 4WD 3.5 US qt (3.3 )
＊1 : LX and LX-VP models ＊2 : EX, EX-L, and EX-SE models fluid 2WD 4.0 US qt (3.8 )
Weights Total
Gross vehicle weight rating See the tire information label atta- 4WD 8.3 US qt (7.9 )
ched to the driver’s doorjamb. 2WD 8.9 US qt (8.4 )
Gross combined weight＊2 9,700 lbs (4,400 kg) ＊1 Rear Change 2.79 US qt (2.64 )
rating (GCWR) differential
＊1 : Equipped with transmission fluid cooler and power steering fluid (4WD)
fluid cooler. Windshield
＊2 : The GCWR must be reduced 2 percent for every 1,000 feet (305 washer 4.8 US qt (4.5 )
meters) of elevation. reservoir
Seating Capacities ＊1 : Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
Total 8 engine
Front 2 Reserve tank capacity:
Rear Second row 3 0.193 US gal (0.73 )
Third row 3 ＊2 : Excluding the oil remaining in the engine
Battery
Capacity 12 V − 20 AH/5 HR
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
294
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：５３：４０３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００３００

Specifications
Lights Engine
Headlights High 12 V − 60 W (HB3) Type Water cooled 4-stroke SOHC,
Low 12 V − 55 W (H11) i-VTEC V6 gasoline engine (2WD)
Front side marker lights 12 V − 5W Water cooled 4-stroke SOHC,
Front position lights 12 V − 5W VTEC V6 gasoline engine (4WD)
Front turn signal lights 12 V − 21 W (AMBER) Bore x Stroke 3.50 x 3.66 in (89.0 x 93.0 mm)
Side turn signal lights 12 V − 3 CP Displacement 211.8 cu-in (3,471 cm )
Front fog lights 12 V − 55 W (H11) Compression ratio 10.0 : 1
Rear side marker lights 12 V − 3 CP Spark plugs NGK: IZFR5K-11
Rear turn signal/hazard lights 12 V − 21 W/5 W DENSO: SKJ16DR-M11
Stop/Taillights 12 V − 21 W/5 W
Backup lights 12 V − 21 CP (18 W) Air Conditioning
License plate lights 12 V − 3 CP Refrigerant type HFC-134a (R-134a)
High-mount brake light 12 V − 21 CP (18 W) Charge quantity 24.7−26.5 oz (700−750 g)
Front map lights 12 V − 8 W ＊1 Lubricant type ND-OIL8
12 V − 4 CP ＊2
Rear map lights 12 V − 5W Alignment
Cargo area light 12 V − 5W Toe-in Front 0.00 in (0.0 mm)
Vanity mirror light 12 V − 1.1 W Rear 0.00 in (0.0 mm)
Door (Courtesy) light 12 V − 3.8 W Camber Front −0°66’ (2WD) −0°50’ (4WD)
＊1 : EX-L and EX-SE models Rear −0°76’ (2WD) −0°50’ (4WD)
＊2 : LX, LX-VP, and EX models Caster Front 1°98’ (2WD) 1°88’ (4WD)
Fuses Tires
Interior Driver’s side See page 290 or the fuse label Size Front/Rear P235/70R16 104S
attached to the dashboard. Spare T155/90D16 110M
Passenger’s side See page 290 or the fuse label Pressure Front/Rear 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
attached to the inside of the fuse Spare 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
box door under the dashboard.
Under-hood See page 289 or the fuse box
cover.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
295
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：５３：５０３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００３０１

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all Treadwear Traction

U.S. Federal Safety Requirements. The treadwear grade is a compara- The traction grades, from highest to
All tires are also graded for tive rating based on the wear rate of lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
treadwear, traction, and temperature the tire when tested under controlled grades represent the tire’s ability to
performance according to conditions on a specified government stop on wet pavement as measured
Department of Transportation test course. For example, a tire under controlled conditions on
(DOT) standards. The following graded 150 would wear one and one- specified government test surfaces
explains these gradings. half (1 1/2) times as well on the of asphalt and concrete. A tire
government course as a tire graded marked C may have poor traction
Uniform Tire Quality Grading 100. The relative performance of performance.
Quality grades can be found where tires depends upon the actual condi-
applicable on the tire sidewall tions of their use, however, and may Warning: The traction grade
between tread shoulder and depart significantly from the norm assigned to this tire is based on
maximum section width. For due to variations in driving habits, straight-ahead braking traction tests,
example: service practices and differences in and does not include acceleration,
Treadwear 200 road characteristics and climate. cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
Traction AA traction characteristics.
Temperature A
All passenger car tires must conform

to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
296
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：５３：５４３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００３０２

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Temperature Warning: The temperature grade for

The temperature grades are A (the this tire is established for a tire that
highest), B, and C, representing the is properly inflated and not
tire’s resistance to the generation of overloaded. Excessive speed,
heat and its ability to dissipate heat underinflation, or excessive loading,
when tested under controlled either separately or in combination,
conditions on a specified indoor can cause heat buildup and possible
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tire failure.
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
297
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：５４：０５３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００３０３

Tire Labeling
The tires that came on your vehicle Tire Size R −Tire construction code (R
have a number of markings. Those Whenever tires are replaced, they indicates radial).
you should be aware of are described should be replaced with tires of the
below. same size. Following is an example 16 −Rim diameter in inches.
of tire size with an explanation of
TIRE LABELING EXAMPLE what each component means. 104 −Load index (a numerical code
(1) associated with the maximum
P235/70R16 104S load the tire can carry).
P −Vehicle type (P indicates S −Speed symbol (an

passenger vehicle). alphabetical code indicating
the maximum speed rating).
235 −Tire width in millimeters.
70 −Aspect ratio (the tire’s section

height as a percentage of its
width).
(3)
(1)
(4) (2)
(1) Tire Size
(2) Tire Identification Number (TIN)
(3) Maximum Tire Pressure
(4) Maximum Tire Load
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
298
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：５４：１６３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００３０４

Tire Labeling
Tire Identification Number (TIN) Maximum Tire Pressure

The tire identification number (TIN) Max Press −The maximum air
is a group of numbers and letters pressure the tire can
that look like the following example. hold.
TIN is located on the sidewall of the
tire. Maximum Tire Load
Max Load − The maximum load the
DOT B97R FW6X 2202 tire can carry at
maximum air pressure.
DOT −This indicates that the tire
meets all requirements of
the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
B97R −Manufacturer’s
identification mark.
FW6X −Tire type code.
2202 −Date of manufacture.
year
week
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
299
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：５４：２３３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００３０５

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) − Required Federal Explanation
Each tire, including the spare (if As an added safety feature, your Driving on a significantly under-
provided), should be checked vehicle has been equipped with a tire inflated tire causes the tire to
monthly when cold and inflated to pressure monitoring system (TPMS) overheat and can lead to tire failure.
the inflation pressure recommended that illuminates a low tire pressure Under-inflation also reduces fuel
by the vehicle manufacturer on the telltale efficiency and tire tread life, and may
vehicle placard or tire inflation affect the vehicle’s handling and
pressure label. and/or stopping ability.
(If your vehicle has tires of a when one or more of your tires is Please note that the TPMS is not a
different size than the size indicated significantly under-inflated. substitute for proper tire
on the vehicle placard or tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
inflation pressure label, you should Accordingly, when the low tire responsibility to maintain correct tire
determine the proper tire inflation pressure telltale illuminates, you pressure, even if under-inflation has
pressure for those tires.) should stop and check your tires as not reached the level to trigger
soon as possible, and inflate them to illumination of the TPMS low tire
the proper pressure. pressure telltale.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
300
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：５４：２９３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００３０６

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) − Required Federal Explanation
Your vehicle has also been equipped Always check the TPMS malfunction
with a TPMS malfunction indicator telltale after replacing one or more
to indicate when the system is not tires or wheels on your vehicle to
operating properly. The TPMS ensure that the replacement or
malfunction indicator is provided by alternate tires and wheels allow the
a separate telltale, which displays the TPMS to continue to function
symbol ‘‘TPMS’’ when illuminated. properly.
When the malfunction indicator is

illuminated,
the system may not be able to detect

or signal low tire pressure as
intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a

variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
301
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：５４：３７３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００３０７

Emissions Controls
The burning of gasoline in your The Clean Air Act intake manifold. They are then
vehicle’s engine produces several by- The United States Clean Air Act＊ drawn into the engine and burned.
products. Some of these are carbon sets standards for automobile
monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen emissions. It also requires that Evaporative Emissions Control
(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC). automobile manufacturers explain to System
Gasoline evaporating from the tank owners how their emissions controls As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
also produces hydrocarbons. Con- work and what to do to maintain tank, an evaporative emissions
trolling the production of NOx, CO, them. This section summarizes how control canister filled with charcoal
and HC is important to the environ- the emissions controls work. adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
ment. Under certain conditions of canister while the engine is off. After
＊
sunlight and climate, NOx and HC In Canada, Honda vehicles comply the engine is started and warmed up,
react to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’ with the Canadian emission the vapor is drawn into the engine
Carbon monoxide does not contri- requirements, as specified in an and burned during driving.
bute to smog creation, but it is a agreement with Environment
poisonous gas. Canada, at the time they are Onboard Refueling Vapor
manufactured. Recovery
The onboard refueling vapor
Crankcase Emissions Control recovery (ORVR) system captures
System the fuel vapors during refueling. The
Your vehicle has a positive vapors are adsorbed in a canister
crankcase ventilation system. This filled with activated carbon. While
keeps gasses that build up in the driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
engine’s crankcase from going into into the engine and burned off.
the atmosphere. The positive
crankcase ventilation valve routes
them from the crankcase back to the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
302
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：５４：４７３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００３０８

Emissions Controls
Exhaust Emissions Controls Ignition Timing Control System Replacement Parts

The exhaust emissions controls This system constantly adjusts the The emissions control systems are
include four systems: PGM-FI, ignition timing, reducing the amount designed and certified to work to-
ignition timing control, exhaust gas of HC, CO, and NOx produced. gether in reducing emissions to
recirculation, and three way catalytic levels that comply with the Clean Air
converter. These four systems work Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Act. To make sure the emissions
together to control the engine’s System remain low, you should use only new
combustion and minimize the The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) Honda replacement parts or their
amount of HC, CO, and NOx that system takes some of the exhaust equivalent for repairs. Using lower
come out the tailpipe. The exhaust gas and routes it back into the intake quality parts may increase the
emissions control systems are manifold. Adding exhaust gas to the emissions from your vehicle.
separate from the crankcase and air/fuel mixture reduces the amount
evaporative emissions control of NOx produced when the fuel is The emissions control systems are
systems. burned. covered by warranties separate from
the rest of your vehicle. Read your
PGM-FI System Three Way Catalytic Converter warranty manual for more informa-
The PGM-FI system uses sequential The three way catalytic converter is tion.
multiport fuel injection. in the exhaust system. Through
It has three subsystems: air intake, chemical reactions, it converts HC,
engine control, and fuel control. The CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
powertrain control module (PCM) to carbon dioxide (CO2), nitrogen
uses various sensors to determine (N2), and water vapor.
how much air is going into the
engine. It then controls how much
fuel to inject under all operating
conditions.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
303
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：５４：５４３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００３０９

Three Way Catalytic Converter
The three way catalytic converter

contains precious metals that serve
as catalysts, promoting chemical
reactions to convert the exhaust
gasses without affecting the metals.
The catalytic converter is referred to
as a three-way catalyst, since it acts
on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement
unit must be an original Honda part
or its equivalent.
THREE WAY CATALYTIC
The three way catalytic converter THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER CONVERTERS
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take A defective three way catalytic Keep the engine well maintained.
place. It can set on fire any converter contributes to air pollution,
combustible materials that come and can impair your engine’s per- Have your vehicle diagnosed and
near it. Park your vehicle away from formance. Follow these guidelines to repaired if it is misfiring, back-
high grass, dry leaves, or other protect your vehicle’s three way firing, stalling, or otherwise not
flammables. catalytic converter. running properly.
Always use unleaded gasoline.

Even a small amount of leaded
gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
way catalytic converter ineffective.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
304
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：５５：０３３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００３１０

Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes 1. Make sure the gas tank is nearly, 5. Keep the vehicle in Park. Increase
If you take your vehicle for an but not completely, full (around the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and
emissions test shortly after the 3/4). hold it there until the temperature
battery has been disconnected or gauge rises to at least 1/4 of the
gone dead, it may not pass the test. 2. Make sure the vehicle has been scale (about 3 minutes).
This is because of certain ‘‘readiness parked with the engine off for 6
codes’’ that must be set in the on- hours or more. 6. Without touching the accelerator
board diagnostics for the emissions pedal, let the engine idle for 20
systems. These codes are erased 3. Make sure the ambient seconds.
when the battery is disconnected, temperature is between 40° and
and set again only after several days 95°F. 7. Select a nearby lightly traveled
of driving under a variety of major highway where you can
conditions. 4. Without touching the accelerator maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph
pedal, start the engine, and let it for at least 20 minutes. Drive on
If the testing facility determines that idle for 20 seconds. the highway in D. Do not use the
the readiness codes are not set, you cruise control. When traffic allows,
will be requested to return at a later drive for 90 seconds without
date to complete the test. If you must moving the accelerator pedal.
get the vehicle retested within the (Vehicle speed may vary slightly;
next two or three days, you can this is okay.) If you cannot do this
condition the vehicle for retesting by for a continuous 90 seconds
doing the following. because of traffic conditions, drive
for at least 30 seconds, then repeat
it two more times (for a total of 90
seconds).
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
305
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：５５：０７３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００３１１

Emissions Testing
8. Then drive in city/suburban

traffic for at least 10 minutes.
When traffic conditions allow, let
the vehicle coast for several
seconds without using the
accelerator pedal or the brake
pedal.
9. Make sure the vehicle has been

parked with the engine off for 30
minutes.
If the testing facility determines

the readiness codes are still not
set, see your dealer.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
306
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：５５：１０３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００３１２
Main Menu
Warranty and Customer Relations
Customer Service
Information ................................. 308
Warranty Coverages ..................... 309
Reporting Safety Defects
(U.S. Vehicles) ........................... 310

Authorized Manuals ...................... 311
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
307
2008 Pilot
０７／０８／１０１４：５０：２７３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００３１３

Customer Service Information
Honda dealership personnel are Canadian Owners: When you call or write, please give
trained professionals. They should Customer Relations us this information:
be able to answer all your questions. Honda Canada Inc.
If you encounter a problem that your 715 Milner Avenue Vehicle Identification Number
dealership does not solve to your Toronto, ON (see page 292 )
satisfaction, please discuss it with M1B 2K8 Name and address of the dealer
the dealership’s management. The who services your vehicle
service manager or general manager Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9 Date of purchase
can help. Almost all problems are Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909 Mileage on your vehicle
solved in this way. Toronto (416) 287-4776 Your name, address, and tele-
phone number
If you are dissatisfied with the In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin A detailed description of the
decision made by the dealership’s Islands: problem
management, contact your Honda Name of the dealer who sold the
Customer Service Office. Bella International vehicle to you
P.O. Box 190816
U.S. Owners: San Juan, PR 00919-0816
American Honda Motor Co.
Honda Customer Service Tel: (787) 620-7546
Mail Stop 500-2N-7D
1919 Torrance Boulevard
Torrance, California 90501-2746
Tel: (800) 999-1009
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
308
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：５５：２８３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００３１４

Warranty Coverages
U.S. Owners Seat Belt Limited Warranty − a seat Replacement Battery Limited
Your new vehicle is covered by these belt that fails to function properly is Warranty − provides prorated
warranties: covered by a limited warranty. coverage for a replacement battery
Please read your warranty booklet purchased from your dealer.
New Vehicle Limited Warranty − for details.

covers your new vehicle, except for Replacement Muffler Lifetime
the battery, emissions control Rust Perforation Limited Warranty Limited Warranty − provides
systems, and accessories, against − all exterior body panels are coverage for as long as the pur-
defects in materials and covered for rust-through from the chaser of the muffler owns the
workmanship. inside for the specified time period vehicle.
with no mileage limit.
Emissions Control Systems Defects Restrictions and exclusions apply to
Warranty and Emissions Accessory Limited Warranty − all these warranties. Please read the
Performance Warranty − these two Honda accessories are covered 2008 Honda warranty information
warranties cover your vehicle’s under this warranty. Time and booklet that came with your vehicle
emissions control systems. Time, mileage limits depend on the type of for precise information on warranty
mileage, and coverage are accessory and other factors. Please coverages. Your vehicle’s original
conditional. Please read your read your warranty booklet for tires are covered by their
warranty booklet for exact details. manufacturer. Tire warranty
information. information is in a separate booklet.
Replacement Parts Limited
Original Equipment Battery Limited Warranty − covers all Honda Canadian Owners
Warranty − this warranty gives up replacement parts against defects in Please refer to the 2008 warranty
to 100 % credit toward a replacement materials and workmanship. manual that came with your vehicle.
battery.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
309
2008 Pilot
０７／０８／１０１４：５０：３２３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００３１５

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)
If you believe that your vehicle has a If NHTSA receives similar com- To contact NHTSA, you may call the
defect which could cause a crash or plaints, it may open an investigation, Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
could cause injury or death, you and if it finds that a safety defect 1-888-327-4236
should immediately inform the exists in a group of vehicles, it may (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
National Highway Traffic Safety order a recall and remedy campaign. http://www.saf ercar.gov; or write to:
Administration (NHTSA) in addition However, NHTSA cannot become Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
to notifying American Honda Motor involved in individual problems Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC
Co., Inc. between you, your dealer, or 20590.
American Honda Motor Co., Inc. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.saf ercar.gov.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
310
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：５５：４０３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００３１６
Main Menu
Authorized Manuals
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals Service Manual:

(U.S.only) Covers maintenance and recommended procedures for
The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm repair to engine and chassis components. It is written
Incorporated. You can order by phone or online: for the journeyman mechanic, but it is simple enough
Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only) for most mechanically inclined owners to understand.
Go online at www. helminc. com
If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc. Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
at 1-800-782-4356. Complements the Service Manual by providing in-depth
troubleshooting information for each electrical circuit
Publication Form Description in your vehicle.
Form Number
61S9V05 2006-2008 Honda Pilot Service Manual Body Repair Manual:
Authorized Manuals
61S9V05EL 2008 Honda Pilot Describes the procedures involved in the replacement
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual of damaged body parts.
61S9V30 2003 Model Series Honda Pilot
Body Repair Manual
31S9V650 2008 Honda Pilot Owner’s Manual
31S9V810 2008 Honda Pilot
Navigation System Owner’s Manual
31S9VM30 2008 Honda Pilot Honda Service History
31S9VQ50 2008 Honda Pilot Quick Start Guide
HON-R Order Form for Previous Years-
Indicate Year and Model Desired
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
311
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：５５：４３３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００３１７
Main Menu
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
312
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：５５：４８３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００３１８
Main Menu
Index
A Checking Fluid Level ................ 250 Braking System.............................. 215

Shifting ........................................ 206 Break-in, New Vehicle .................. 188
Accessories and Modifications .... 196 Shift Lever Position Indicator .. 206 Brightness Control, Instruments ... 76
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key Shift Lever Positions ................. 207 Brights, Headlights ......................... 75
Position) ........................................ 81 Shift Lock Release ..................... 209 Bulb Replacement
Accessory Power Sockets............. 101 Back-up Lights ........................... 258
AC Power Outlet ............................ 102 B Brake Lights ...................... 258, 259
Additives, Engine Oil..................... 245 Front Parking Lights ................. 255
Advanced Airbag System................ 30 Battery Front Side Marker Lights......... 255
Airbag (SRS) .............................. 11, 25 Charging System Headlights .................................. 254
Airbag System Components ........... 25 Indicator............................ 62, 282 High-mount Brake Lights......... 259
Air Conditioning System ............... 106 Jump Starting ............................. 278 Rear Bulbs .................................. 258
Rear A/C Control ...................... 113 Maintenance ............................... 269 Specifications ............................. 295
Air Pressure, Tires ........................ 264 Specifications ............................. 294 Turn Signal Light .............. 255, 258
Antifreeze ....................................... 248 Before Driving ............................... 187 Bulbs, Halogen ............................... 254
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) ................ 216 Belts, Seat ................................... 10, 21
Indicator ................................ 63, 217 Beverage Holders ............................ 99 C
Operation .................................... 216 Booster Seats ................................... 54
Anti-theft, Audio System............... 141 Brakes Capacities Chart............................. 294
Anti-theft Steering Column Lock .. 81 Anti-lock System (ABS) ............ 216 Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 57
Audio System ................................. 115 Break-in, New Linings .............. 188 Carrying Cargo .............................. 198
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners .... 23 Bulb Replacement ..................... 258 CAUTION, Explanation of .............. iii
Automatic Lighting Off Feature .... 76 Fluid ............................................ 252 CD Changer ........................... 131, 134
INDEX
Automatic Speed Control.............. 177 Parking .......................................... 97 CD Player........................................ 130
Automatic Transmission............... 206 System Indicator .................. 63, 284
Capacity, Fluid ........................... 294 Wear Indicators ......................... 215 CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
I
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：５５：５２３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００３１９
Main Menu
Index
Certification Label ......................... 292 Conversation Mirror .................... 100 Doors

Chains ............................................. 268 Crankcase Emissions Control Locking and Unlocking ............... 82
Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 273 System......................................... 302 DOT Tire Quality Grading ........... 296
Change Oil Cruise Control Operation ............. 177 Driver and Passenger Safety ............ 7
How to ......................................... 246 Customer Service Information..... 308 Driving ............................................ 203
When to....................................... 237 Economy ..................................... 193
Charging System Indicator .... 62, 282 D DVD Player .................................... 144
Checklist, Before Driving ............. 204 DVD Player Error Message ......... 173
Childproof Door Locks ................... 83 DANGER, Explanation of ................ iii
Child Seats Dashboard .................................... 4, 60 E
LATCH.......................................... 47 Daytime Running Lights................. 76
Tether Anchorage Points ........... 51 Daytime Running Lights Economy, Fuel ............................... 193
Climate Control System ................ 112 Indicator ........................................ 67 Emergencies on the Road............. 271
Clock, Setting the .......................... 142 Dead Battery .................................. 278 Battery, Jump Starting .............. 278
Code, Audio System ...................... 141 Defects, Reporting Safety............. 310 Brake System Indicator ............ 284
CO in the Exhaust ......................... 302 Defogger, Rear Window ................. 77 Changing a Flat Tire ................. 273
Cold Weather, Starting in ............. 205 Defrosting the Windows....... 108, 110 Charging System Indicator ...... 282
Compact Spare Tire....................... 272 Dimensions ..................................... 294 Checking the Fuses................... 285
Console Compartment .................... 99 Dimming the Headlights ................ 75 Low Oil Pressure Indicator ...... 282
Consumer Information.................. 308 Dipstick Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 283
Controls, Instruments and .............. 59 Automatic Transmission........... 250 Overheated Engine ................... 280
Coolant Engine Oil ................................... 191 Emergency Brake ............................ 97
Adding ......................................... 248 Directional Signals..................... 66, 75 Emergency Flashers ....................... 77
Checking ..................................... 192 Disc Brake Wear Indicators ......... 215 Emergency Towing ....................... 285
Proper Solution .......................... 248 Disposal of Used Oil ...................... 247 Emissions Controls........................ 302
Temperature Gauge .................... 71 Emissions Testing ......................... 305
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
II
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：５５：５８３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００３２０
Main Menu
Index
Engine Fluids Gauges

Coolant Temperature Gauge ..... 71 Automatic Transmission........... 250 Engine Coolant Temperature .... 71
Malfunction Indicator Brake ........................................... 252 Fuel ................................................ 70
Lamp ................................. 62, 283 Power Steering........................... 253 GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Oil Pressure Indicator ......... 62, 282 Windshield Washers ................. 249 Rating) ........................................ 221
Oil, What Kind to Use ............... 245 Folding the Third Seat .................... 90 GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
Overheating................................ 280 Four-way Flashers ........................... 77 Rating) ........................................ 221
Specifications ............................. 295 Fuel .................................................. 188 Gearshift Lever Positions ............. 206
Speed Limiter ............................. 208 Cap Message ................................ 72 Glove Box ......................................... 99
Starting........................................ 205 Fill Door and Cap....................... 189 GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Evaporative Emissions Controls .. 302 Gauge ............................................ 70 Rating) ........................................ 221
Exhaust Fumes ................................ 57 Octane Requirement ................. 188
Exhaust Gas Recirculation Reserve Indicator......................... 67 H
System......................................... 303 Tank, Filling the......................... 189
Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat Fuses, Checking the ...................... 285 Halogen Headlight Bulbs.............. 254
Belts by ......................................... 19 Hazard Warning Button .................. 77
G
F
Gas Mileage, Improving................ 194
Fan, Interior.................................... 106 Gasoline .......................................... 188
Features .......................................... 105 Fuel Reserve Indicator ................ 67
Filling the Fuel Tank ..................... 189 Gauge ............................................ 70
Filters Octane Requirement ................. 188
INDEX
Oil ................................................ 246 Tank, Filling the......................... 189
Flashers, Hazard Warning.............. 77 Gas Station Procedures................. 189
Flat Tire, Changing a .................... 273 CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
III
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：５６：０４３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００３２１
Main Menu
Index
Headlights......................................... 75 Ignition K
Aiming ......................................... 254 Keys............................................... 79
Automatic Lighting Off ............... 76 Switch ............................................ 81 Keys ................................................... 79
Daytime Running Lights............. 76 Timing Control System ............. 303
High Beam Indicator ................... 67 Immobilizer System......................... 80 L
High Beams, Turning on ............ 75 Important Handling Information .... iv
Low Beams, Turning on ............. 75 Important Safety Precautions .......... 8 Label, Certification ........................ 292
Reminder Chime .......................... 76 Indicators, Instrument Panel .......... 61 Lane Change, Signaling .................. 75
Replacing Halogen Bulbs ......... 254 Infant Restraint ................................ 43 Lap/Shoulder Belts ......................... 22
Turning on .................................... 75 Infant Seats ....................................... 43 LATCH Anchorage System............ 47
Headphones.................................... 174 Inflation, Proper Tire .................... 263 Lights ........................................ 75, 102
Head Restraints ............................... 91 Inside Mirror .................................... 92 Bulb Replacement ..................... 254
Heated Mirror .................................. 94 Inspection, Tire .............................. 265 Indicator ........................................ 61
Heater, Seat ...................................... 86 Installing a Child Seat Parking .......................................... 75
Heating and Cooling ...................... 106 LATCH.......................................... 47 Turn Signal ................................... 75
High Altitude, Starting at .............. 205 Tether Anchorage Points ........... 51 Load Limits..................................... 199
High-Low Beam Switch .................. 75 Instrument Panel ............................. 61 LOCK (Ignition Key Position) ....... 81
High-mount Brake Light............... 259 Instrument Panel Brightness ......... 76 Locks
HomeLink Universal Introduction ......................................... i Anti-theft Steering Column ........ 81
Transceiver................................. 183 Fuel Fill Door ............................. 189
Hood, Opening the ........................ 190 J Glove Box ..................................... 99
Lockout Prevention ..................... 82
I Jacking up the Vehicle .................. 274 Power Door .................................. 82
Jack, Tire ........................................ 273 Low Coolant Level ......................... 192
Identification Number, Vehicle.... 292 Jump Starting ................................. 278 Low Fuel Indicator .......................... 67
Low Oil Pressure Indicator .... 62, 282
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
IV
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：５６：１０３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００３２２
Main Menu
Index
Lower Anchor .................................. 47 O Parking Brake .................................. 97

Lubricant Specifications Chart .... 294 Parking Brake and Brake System
Luggage .......................................... 198 Octane Requirement, Gasoline .... 188 Indicator ................................ 63, 284
Odometer .......................................... 70 Parking Lights.................................. 75
M Odometer, Trip ................................ 70 Parking Over Things that Burn ... 304
Off-Highway Driving ..................... 230 Playing the Radio ........................... 117
Maintenance ................................... 235 Off-Road Precautions .................... 230 Playing a Disc ................................. 130
Owner’s Maintenance Oil Playing the Disc Changer ..... 131, 134
Checks .................................... 242 Change, How to ......................... 246 PGM-FI System.............................. 303
Minder ................................. 237-243 Change, When to ....................... 237 Power Seat Adjustments ................. 87
Minder Indicator .......................... 69 Checking Engine ....................... 191 Power Socket Locations.................. 98
Safety........................................... 236 Pressure Indicator ............... 62, 282 Power Windows ............................... 94
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .. 62, 283 Selecting Proper Viscosity Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts .......... 19
Manual Seat Adjustments............... 88 Chart ....................................... 245 Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 12
Meters, Gauges ................................ 70 ON (Ignition Key Position) ............ 81 Additional Safety Precautions .... 20
Modifications.................................. 197 Onboard Refueling Vapor Advice for Pregnant Women...... 19
Moonroof .......................................... 96 Recovery ..................................... 302 Protecting Children ......................... 38
Outside Mirrors ............................... 93 Protecting Infants ............................ 43
N Overheating, Engine ..................... 280 Protecting Larger Children ............ 53
Owner’s Maintenance Checks ..... 242 Protecting Small Children .............. 44
Neutral Gear Position.................... 207
New Vehicle Break-in ................... 188 P
NOTICE, Explanation of .................... i
INDEX
Numbers, Identification ................ 292 Panel Brightness Control ............... 76
Park Gear Position......................... 207
Parking ............................................ 214 CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
V
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：５６：１４３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００３２３
Main Menu
Index
R Wiper Blades .............................. 261 System Components.................... 25

Replacing Seat Belts After a Use During Pregnancy................ 19
Radiator Overheating .................... 280 Crash ............................................. 23 Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt .... 15
Radio/CD Sound System .............. 115 Reserve Tank, Engine Coolant .... 192 Seat Heaters ..................................... 86
Readiness Codes ............................ 305 Restraint, Child ................................ 38 Seats .................................................. 87
Rear A/C Unit ................................ 113 Reverse Gear Position................... 207 Folding the Second Seat ............. 89
Rear Audio Control Panel ............. 149 Rotation, Tire ................................. 266 Folding the Third Seat ................ 90
Rear Entertainment System ......... 144 Head Restraints ........................... 91
Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement ... 258 S Reclining the Second Seat .......... 89
Rear View Camera and Monitor .. 182 Reclining the Third Seat ............. 90
Rear View Mirror ............................. 92 Safety Belts....................................... 10 Third Seat Access ........................ 90
Rear Window Defogger .................. 77 Safety Defects, Reporting............. 310 Seats, Adjusting the .................... 87-91
Rear Window Wiper and Washer .. 74 Safety Features .................................. 9 Security System ............................. 176
Reclining the Seat Backs ........... 87-91 Airbags .......................................... 11 Serial Number ................................ 292
Reminder Lights .............................. 61 Seat Belts ...................................... 10 Service Intervals ............................ 237
Remote Audio Controls................. 140 Safety Labels, Location of .............. 58 Service Manual .............................. 311
Remote Control (RES) .................. 171 Safety Messages ............................... iii Service Station Procedures .......... 189
Remote Transmitter ........................ 83 Seat Belts .......................................... 10 Setting the Clock ........................... 142
Replacement Information Additional Information ................ 21 Shifting the Automatic
Engine Oil and Filter ................. 246 Automatic Seat Belt Transmission .............................. 206
Floor Mats .................................. 260 Tensioners ................................ 23 Shift Lever Position Indicator ...... 206
Fuses ........................................... 285 Cleaning ...................................... 260 Shift Lock Release ......................... 209
Light Bulbs ................................. 254 Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 22 Side Marker Lights, Bulb
Minder......................................... 243 Maintenance ................................. 23 Replacement in .......................... 255
Timing Belt ................................. 252 Reminder Light and Side Airbags ............................... 11, 31
Tires ............................................ 265 Beeper ................................. 21, 62 Off Indicator ........................... 34, 63
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
VI
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：５６：１９３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００３２４
Main Menu
Index
Signaling Turns ................................ 75 Steering Wheel Temperature, Outside ..................... 71

Snow Tires ...................................... 268 Adjustment ................................... 78 Tensioners, Seat Belts .................... 23
Sound System ................................. 115 Anti-theft Column Lock .............. 81 Testing of Readiness Codes ......... 305
Spare Tire Buttons................................ 140, 177 Tether Anchorage Points ............... 51
Inflating ....................................... 272 Stereo Sound System .................... 115 Theft Protection............................. 141
Specifications ............................. 295 Storing Your Vehicle ..................... 270 Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 304
Specifications Charts..................... 294 Sunglasses Holder ......................... 100 Time, Setting the ........................... 142
Speed Control ................................. 177 Sun Visor......................................... 101 Tilt the Steering Wheel................... 78
SRS, Additional Information........... 25 Supplemental Restraint System Timing Belt ..................................... 252
Additional Safety Precautions .... 37 Servicing ....................................... 36 Tire Chains ..................................... 268
Airbag Service .............................. 36 SRS Indicator.......................... 33, 63 Tire, How to Change a Flat .......... 273
How the Side Airbag Off System Components.................... 25 Tire Pressure Monitoring
Indicator Work ......................... 34 Synthetic Oil ................................... 246 System (TPMS) ................. 211, 300
How the SRS Indicator Works ... 33
How Your Front Airbags T
Work.......................................... 28
How Your Side Airbags Work.... 31 Taillights, Changing Bulbs in ....... 258
SRS Components ......................... 25 Taking Care of the Unexpected .. 271
SRS Indicator.............................. 33, 63 Technical Descriptions
START (Ignition Key Position) ..... 81 DOT Tire Quality Grading ....... 296
Starting the Engine........................ 205 Emissions Control Systems ...... 302
In Cold Weather at High Emissions Testing ..................... 305
Altitude ................................... 205 Three Way Catalytic
INDEX
With a Dead Battery ................. 278 Converter ................................ 304
Steam Coming from Engine ......... 280 Temperature Gauge ........................ 71
Temperature, Inside Sensor ......... 114 CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
VII
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：５６：２４３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００３２５
Main Menu
Index
Tires ................................................ 263 Treadwear ...................................... 296 W

Air Pressure ............................... 264 Trip Meter ........................................ 70
Checking Wear .......................... 265 Turn Signals ..................................... 75 WARNING, Explanation of ............. iii
Compact Spare ........................... 272 Warning Labels, Location of .......... 58
DOT Tire Quality Grading ....... 296 U Warranty Coverages ..................... 309
Inflation ....................................... 263 Washer, Windshield
Inspection ................................... 265 Unexpected, Taking Care Checking the Fluid Level ......... 249
Maintenance ............................... 266 of the ........................................... 271 Level Indicator ............................. 67
Replacing .................................... 266 Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..... 296 Operation ...................................... 74
Rotating....................................... 266 Unleaded Gasoline......................... 188 Wheels
Service Life ................................. 265 Used Oil, How to Dispose of ........ 247 Adjusting the Steering ................ 78
Snow ............................................ 268 Alignment and Balance ............. 266
Specifications ............................. 295 V Compact Spare ........................... 272
Tools, Tire Changing .................... 273 Nut Wrench ................................ 275
Towing Vanity Mirror ................................. 101 Windows
A Trailer ...................................... 220 Vehicle Capacity Load .................. 199 Operating the Power ................... 94
Emergency Wrecker ................. 285 Vehicle Dimensions....................... 294 Rear, Defogger ............................ 77
Equipment and Accessories ..... 227 Vehicle Identification Number..... 292 Windshield
Traction Devices........................ 268 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) Defroster ............................ 108, 110
Trailer Driving Tips................... 227 System..................................... 218 Washers ........................................ 74
Weight Limit .............................. 223 VSA Off Switch .......................... 219 Wipers, Windshield
Transmission Vehicle Storage .............................. 270 Changing Blades ........................ 261
Checking Fluid Level ................ 250 VIN .................................................. 292 Operation ...................................... 74
Fluid Selection............................ 250 Viscosity, Oil................................... 245 Rear Window Wiper and
Identification Number............... 292 VTM-4 Lock ................................... 210 Washer ...................................... 74
Shifting the Automatic .............. 206 Wireless Headphones ................... 174
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
VIII
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：５６：２７３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００３２６
Main Menu
Index
Worn Tires ..................................... 265

Wrecker, Emergency Towing ...... 285
INDEX
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
IX
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：５６：２９３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００３２７
Main Menu
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：５６：３１３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００３２８
Main Menu
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：５６：４５３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００３２９
Main Menu
Service Information Summary
Gasoline: Power Steering Fluid: Tire Pressure (measured cold):

Unleaded gasoline, pump octane Honda Power Steering Fluid Front/Rear:
number of 87 or higher. preferred, or another brand of 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
power steering fluid as a Compact Spare Tire:
Fuel Tank Capacity: temporary replacement. Do not 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
20.34 US gal (77.0 ) use ATF (see page 253 ).
Recommended Engine Oil: Brake Fluid:

API Premium grade 5W-20 Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
detergent oil (see page 245 ). DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
Oil change capacity (including replacement (see page 252 ).
filter):
4.5 US qt (4.3 ) 4WD models only
Rear Differential Fluid:
Automatic Transmission Fluid: Honda VTM-4 Differential Fluid
Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic (see page 251 ).
Transmission Fluid) (see page
251 ).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2008 Pilot
０７／０５／０９１１：１２：１３３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００００１
Main Menu
Owner’s Identification
OWNER This owner’s manual should be considered

a permanent part of the vehicle and should
remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
This owner’s manual covers all models of

ADDRESS the Pilot. You may find descriptions of
STREET equipment and features that are not on your
particular model.
The information and specifications included

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/ in this publication were in effect at the time
POSTAL CODE of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,
V. I. N. Ltd. reserves the right, however, to
discontinue or change specifications or
design at any time without notice and
DELIVERY DATE without incurring any obligation whatsoever.
(Date sold to original retail purchaser)
DEALER NAME DEALER NO. POUR CLIENTS CANADIEN

AVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avez
besoin d’un Manuel du Conducteur
ADDRESS en français, veuillez demander à
STREET votre concessionnaire de
commander le numéro de pièce
33S9VC50
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
OWNER’S SIGNATURE
DEALER’S SIGNATURE
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2008 Pilot

2008 Pilot PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2008 Pilot PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

０７／０５／０９ １１：１２：１８ ３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０ ０００２

Maintaining your vehicle according to the schedules given in this manual

California Proposition 65 Warning

Event Data Recorders

Service Diagnostic Recorders

Owner's Identification Form

Service Information Summary ( fluid capacities and tire pressures)

Contents features. Technical Information

MOONROOF BUTTONS＊2 HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNAL/FOG LIGHTS＊2 HORN＊1 HAZARD WARNING BUTTON

Your Vehicle at a Glance

LIGHT CONTROL PASSENGER AIRBAG

REMOTE AUDIO STEERING WHEEL CRUISE CONTROL WINDSHIELD WIPERS/

Driver and Passenger Safety

Main Menu Table Of Contents

Main Menu Table Of Contents

Your vehicle is equipped with many

Driver and Passenger Safety

However, you and your passengers

Main Menu Table Of Contents

Seat Belts Help keep you from being thrown

Main Menu Table Of Contents

Driver and Passenger Safety

Main Menu Table Of Contents

Main Menu Table Of Contents

Driver and Passenger Safety

Main Menu Table Of Contents

3.Adjust the Seat-Backs

Sitting too close to a front Reclining the seat-back too far

Once your seat is adjusted correctly, Reclining a seat-back so that the

Main Menu Table Of Contents

4.Adjust the Head Restraints 5.Fasten and Position the Seat

Driver and Passenger Safety

Main Menu Table Of Contents

This spreads the forces of a crash

Improperly positioning the seat

Make sure all seat belts are

If necessary, pull up on the belt again

Main Menu Table Of Contents

Driver and Passenger Safety

Insert the hook at the end of the

Main Menu Table Of Contents

Never place the shoulder portion of a 6.Maintain a Proper Sitting

Main Menu Table Of Contents

Driver and Passenger Safety

This will reduce the risk of injuries

Main Menu Table Of Contents

Main Menu Table Of Contents

Driver and Passenger Safety

Main Menu Table Of Contents

Main Menu Table Of Contents

Driver and Passenger Safety

The tensioners are designed to

Main Menu Table Of Contents

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,

Main Menu Table Of Contents

Airbag System Components

(1) Driver’s Front Airbag

Driver and Passenger Safety

Main Menu Table Of Contents

Your Airbag System includes:

Two side airbags, one for the

Main Menu Table Of Contents

Driver and Passenger Safety

０７／０５／０９１１：１２：１８３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５００００２